diff options
author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2024-07-14 20:14:08 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2024-07-14 20:14:08 +0000 |
commit | b78a525060cf1ff47052f4f6757f00a9a3e8f867 (patch) | |
tree | d8195e8c4587c10673c0e4ba87597b1e0ff52b31 /Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex | |
parent | 7dfb9e87da2cae3811e28b3cd9ec7771cc59490d (diff) |
cjs-rcs-article (14jul24)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@71799 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex')
13 files changed, 28 insertions, 10081 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/README.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/README.md index 69c983dbb73..e28620a02d2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/README.md +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/README.md @@ -16,11 +16,12 @@ compatible with the traditional engine pdfLaTeX. ## Licence LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c or (at your option) any -later version. +later version. The documentation is also licensed under CC BY-SA 4.0 +International. ## Version -1.0 (2023-11-29) + ## Author @@ -103,7 +104,7 @@ version history of the bibliographic styles appears in ## Comments or suggestions -The Gitlab [project repository](https://gitlab.com/cjs-rcs/cjs-rcs-article) +The GitLab [project repository](https://gitlab.com/cjs-rcs/cjs-rcs-article) is the best place to report bugs or to propose improvements to the project. @@ -127,11 +128,12 @@ grande partie compatible avec le moteur pdfLaTeX. ## Licence LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c ou (à votre choix) toute -version ultérieure. +version ultérieure. La documentation est également publiée sous +licence CC BY-SA 4.0 International. ## Version -1.0 (2023-11-29) + ## Auteur diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.pdf Binary files differindex 5ec31c2669c..c64b7fa0a24 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex deleted file mode 100644 index b7f01a64fda..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5 +0,0 @@ -%% Wrapper to set language to French -%% (https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/28646). -\expandafter\newif\csname ifenglish\endcsname -\englishfalse -\input{cjs-rcs-article.dtx} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article.pdf Binary files differindex dc76f9053ec..4d9c8ae4f8d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-article.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj deleted file mode 100644 index 38907626da6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj +++ /dev/null @@ -1,611 +0,0 @@ -%% Driver file to produce cjs-rcs-en.bst from cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs -%% Originally generated with makebst, version 4.1 (2003/09/08), -%% on 2023/10/05 at 15:25, then hand edited by Vincent Goulet. -%% -\input docstrip - -\preamble - -Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société -canadienne de statistique - -This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions -of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this -license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version -of this license is in: - - https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet -<vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>. - -This work consists of the master bibliographic style file -cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs, the language definition file cjs-rcs-english.mbs, -the driver file cjs-rcs-en.dbj, and the derived file cjs-rcs-en.bst. - -\endpreamble - -\postamble -End of customized bst file -\endpostamble - -\keepsilent - -\askforoverwritefalse -\def\MBopts{\from{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}{% -%EXTERNAL FILES: -%Name of language file: \cfile=cjs-rcs-english.mbs. -%No included files. - head,\MBopta} -\from{cjs-rcs-english.mbs}{\MBopta} -\from{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}} -\def\MBopta{% -%INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT (if no external language file) -% %: (def) English -% babel,%: Babel -%-------------------- - exlang,%: External language file -%STYLE OF CITATIONS: -% %: (def) Numerical - ay,%: Author-year -% alph,%: Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90 -% alph,alf-1,%: Alpha style, Jon90 -% alph,alf-f,%: Alpha style, Jones90 -% cite,%: Cite key -%-------------------- -%HTML OUTPUT (if non author-year citations) -% %: (def) Normal LaTeX -% html,%: Hypertext -% html,htlist,%: Hypertext list -% html,htdes,%: Hypertext with keys -%-------------------- -%AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM (if author-year citations) - nat,%: Natbib -% %: (def) Older Natbib -% alk,%: Apalike -% har,%: Harvard -% ast,%: Astronomy -% cay,%: Chicago -% nmd,%: Named -% cn,%: Author-date -%-------------------- -%HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED (if Harvard support selected) -% harnm,%: With Harvard extensions -% %: (def) Older Harvard -%-------------------- -%LANGUAGE FIELD -% %: (def) No language field - lang,%: Add language field -%-------------------- -%ANNOTATIONS: - %: (def) No annotations -% annote,%: Annotations -%-------------------- -%PRESENTATIONS: - %: (def) Do not add presentation type -% pres,%: Add presentation, speaker not highlighted -% pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face -% pres,pres-it,%: Presentaion, speaker italic -% pres,pres-sc,%: Presentaion, speaker in small caps -%-------------------- -%ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if non-author/year and non-alph) -% %: (def) Alphabetical -% seq-no,%: Citation order -% seq-yr,%: Year ordered -% seq-yrr,%: Reverse year ordered -%-------------------- -%ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if author-year citations) - %: (def) Alphabetical -% seq-lab,%: By label -% seq-labc,%: By label and cite order -% seq-key,%: By label and cite key -% seq-yr,%: Year ordered -% seq-yrr,%: Reverse year ordered -% seq-no,%: Citation order -%-------------------- -%ORDER ON VON PART (if not citation order) - %: (def) Sort on von part -% vonx,%: Sort without von part -%-------------------- -%IGNORE FIRST NAMES (if author-year citations) - %: (def) Respect first names -% xintls,%: Sort on surname only -%-------------------- -%AUTHOR NAMES: -% ed-au,%: Full, surname last -% nm-revf,%: Full, surname first -% nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname - nm-rev,%: Surname + initials -% nm-rv,%: Surname + dotless initials -% nm-rvvc,%: Surname + comma + spaceless initials -% nm-rvx,%: Surname + pure initials -% nm-rvcx,%: Surname + comma + pure initials -% nm-rvv,%: Surname + spaceless initials -% nm-rev1,%: Only first name reversed, initials -% nm-revv1,%: First name reversed, with full names -%-------------------- -%EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS (if author names reversed) - %: (def) Editor names NOT reversed -% ed-rev,%: Editor names reversed -%-------------------- -%POSITION OF JUNIOR (if author names reversed) - jnrlst,%: Junior comes last -% %: (def) Junior between -%-------------------- -%JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION (if author-year citations) - %: (def) No `junior' part in the citations -% jnrlab,%: `Junior' in citations -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES: - %: (def) Author names separated by commas -% aunm-semi,%: Names separated by semi-colon -% aunm-sl,%: Names separated by slash -%-------------------- -%ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES: - %: (def) Author/editor names always present -% nmdash,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash -% nmdash,nmd-2,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes -% nmdash,nmd-3,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes -%-------------------- -%NUMBER OF AUTHORS IN BIBLIOGRAPHY: - %: (def) All authors -% nmlm,%: Limited authors -%-------------------- -%AUTHORS IN CITATIONS: - %: (def) One author et al -% mcite,%: Some other truncation scheme -%-------------------- -%MAX AUTHORS BEFORE ET AL: (if regular cite not selected) -% mct-1,%: One et al -% mct-2,%: One, Two et al -% mct-3,%: One, Two, Three et al -% mct-4,%: One, Two, Three, Four et al -% mct-5,%: One, Two, Three, Four, Five et al -% mct-6,%: One, Two, Three, Four, Five, Six et al -%-------------------- -%MAX AUTHORS WITHOUT ET AL: (if regular cite not selected) -% mct-x2,%: Two authors without truncating -% mct-x3,%: Three authors -% mct-x4,%: Four authors -% mct-x5,%: Five authors -% mct-x6,%: Six authors -%-------------------- -%TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES: - %: (def) Normal font for author names -% nmft,nmft-sc,%: Small caps authors -% nmft,nmft-it,%: Italic authors -% nmft,nmft-bf,%: Bold authors -% nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font -%-------------------- -%FONT FOR FIRST NAMES (if non-default font for authors) -% %: (def) First names same font as surnames -% fnm-rm,%: First names in normal font -% fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font -%-------------------- -%EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC: -% %: (def) Editors incollection normal font -% nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors -%-------------------- -%FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST: -% %: (def) `And' in author font -% nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font -%-------------------- -%FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT (if author-year citations) - %: (def) Cited authors plain -% lab,lab-it,%: Cited authors italic -% lab,lab-sc,%: Cited authors small caps -% lab,lab-bf,%: Cited authors bold -% lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font -%-------------------- -%FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS (if non-default font for citation lables) -% %: (def) Cited `and' in author font -% and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font -%-------------------- -%FONT OF EXTRA LABEL (The extra letter on the year) - %: (def) Extra label plain -% xlab-it,%: Extra label italic -%-------------------- -%LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING (if author-year citations) - keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author -% %: (def) Year included when KEY replaces missing author -%-------------------- -%MISSING DATE (if author-year citations) -% %: (def) Missing date set to ???? - blkyear,%: Missing date left blank -%-------------------- -%DATE POSITION: -% %: (def) Date at end - dt-beg,%: Date after authors -% dt-jnl,%: Date part of journal spec. -% dt-end,%: Date at very end -%-------------------- -%DATE FORMAT (if non author-year citations) -% %: (def) Plain month and year -% yr-par,%: Date in parentheses -% yr-brk,%: Date in brackets -% yr-col,%: Date preceded by colon -% yr-per,%: Date preceded by period -% yr-com,%: Date preceded by comma -% yr-blk,%: Date preceded by space -%-------------------- -%SUPPRESS MONTH: -% %: (def) Date is month and year -% xmth,%: Date is year only -%-------------------- -%REVERSED DATE (if including month) -% %: (def) Date as month year -% dtrev,%: Date as year month -%-------------------- -%DATE FORMAT (if author-year citations) -% %: (def) Year plain - yr-par,%: Year in parentheses -% yr-brk,%: Year in brackets -% yr-col,%: Year preceded by colon -% yr-per,%: Year preceded by period -% yr-com,%: Date preceded by comma -% yr-blk,%: Year preceded by space -%-------------------- -%INCLUDE MONTHS: - %: (def) Date is year only -% aymth,%: Include month in date -%-------------------- -%REVERSED DATE (if including month) -% %: (def) Date as month year -% dtrev,%: Date as year month -%-------------------- -%DATE PUNCTUATION (if date not at end) -% %: (def) Date with standard block punctuation -% yrp-col,%: Colon after date -% yrp-semi,%: Semi-colon after date - yrp-per,%: Period after date -% yrp-x,%: No punct. after date -%-------------------- -%BLANK AFTER DATE: - %: (def) Space after date -% yrpp-xsp,%: No space after date -%-------------------- -%DATE FONT: - %: (def) Date in normal font -% dtbf,%: Date in bold face -%-------------------- -%TRUNCATE YEAR (if author-year citations) - note-yr,%: Year text full -% %: (def) Year truncated -%-------------------- -%TITLE OF ARTICLE: - %: (def) Title plain -% tit-it,%: Title italic -% tit-qq,qt-s,%: Title and punctuation in single quotes -% tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes -% tit-qq,qt-g,%: Title and punctuation in guillemets -% tit-qq,qt-s,qx,%: Title in single quotes -% tit-qq,qx,%: Title in double quotes -% tit-qq,qt-g,qx,%: Title in guillemets -%-------------------- -%COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES (if quoted title) -% bt-qq,%: Quote collection and proceedings titles -% %: (def) Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes -%-------------------- -%CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE: - %: (def) Sentence style -% atit-u,%: Title style -%-------------------- -%ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT: - %: (def) Article title present -% jtit-x,%: No article title -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL NAMES: - %: (def) Periods in journal names -% jxper,%: Dotless journal names -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL NAME FONT: - %: (def) Journal name italics -% jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal -%-------------------- -%THESIS TITLE: - %: (def) Thesis titles like books -% thtit-a,%: Thesis title like article -% thtit-x,%: No thesis title -%-------------------- -%TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE: -% %: (def) Tech. report title like articles - trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books -%-------------------- -%TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER: - %: (def) Tech. report and number plain -% trnum-it,%: Tech. report and number italic -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL VOLUME: - %: (def) Volume plain -% vol-it,%: Volume italic -% vol-bf,%: Volume bold -% vol-2bf,%: Volume and number bold -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER: - %: (def) Journal vol(num) -% vnum-sp,%: Journal vol (num) -% vnum-cm,%: Journal vol, num -% vnum-nr,%: Journal vol, no. num -% vnum-h,%: Journal vol, \# number -% vnum-b,%: Journal vol number -% vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number -%-------------------- -%VOLUME PUNCTUATION: - %: (def) Volume with colon -% volp-sp,%: Volume with colon and space -% volp-semi,%: Volume with semi-colon -% volp-com,%: Volume with comma -% volp-blk,%: Volume with blank -%-------------------- -%YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION: - %: (def) Journal year like others -% jdt-v,%: Journal vol(year) -% jdt-vs,%: Journal vol (year) -% jdt-p,%: Year with pages -% jdt-pc,%: Year, comma, pages -%-------------------- -%PAGE NUMBERS: - %: (def) Start and stop page numbers -% jpg-1,%: Only start page number -%-------------------- -%LARGE PAGE NUMBERS: - %: (def) No separators for large page numbers -% pgsep-c,%: Comma inserted over 9999 -% pgsep-s,%: Thin space inserted over 9999 -% pgsep-p,%: Period inserted over 9999 -%-------------------- -%WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES: - %: (def) Article pages numbers only -% jwdpg,%: Include `page' in articles -%-------------------- -%POSITION OF PAGES: - %: (def) Pages given mid text -% pp-last,%: Pages at end -%-------------------- -%WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES: - %: (def) Article volume as number only -% jwdvol,%: Include `volume' in articles -%-------------------- -%NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS: - num-xser,%: Allows number without series -% %: (def) Standard BibTeX -%-------------------- -%POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES: -% %: (def) After chapter and pages - numser,%: Just before publisher -%-------------------- -%VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS: - %: (def) Vol. 23 of Series -% ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23 -%-------------------- -%POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS: -% %: (def) Series and volume after the editors - ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION: - %: (def) Comma after journal -% jnm-x,%: Space after journal -%-------------------- -%BOOK TITLE: - %: (def) Book title italic -% btit-rm,bt-rm,%: Book title plain -%-------------------- -%PAGES IN BOOKS: - %: (def) Pages in book plain -% bkpg-par,%: Pages in book in parentheses -% bkpg-x,%: Pages in book bare -%-------------------- -%TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK: - %: (def) Total book pages not printed -% pg-bk,%: For book: 345 pages -% pg-bk,pg-pre,%: Total book pages before publisher -%-------------------- -%PUBLISHER ADDRESS: - %: (def) Publisher, address -% add-pub,%: Address: Publisher -%-------------------- -%PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES: - %: (def) Publisher as normal block -% pub-par,%: Publisher in parentheses -% pub-date,%: Publisher and date in parentheses -% pub-date,pub-xc,%: Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma -% pub-date,pub-xpar,%: Publisher and date without parentheses -% pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc,%: Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma -%-------------------- -%PUBLISHER POSITION: -% %: (def) Publisher after chapter, pages -% pre-pub,%: Publisher before chapter, pages - pre-edn,%: Publisher after edition -%-------------------- -%ISBN NUMBER: - isbn,%: Include ISBN -% %: (def) No ISBN -%-------------------- -%ISSN NUMBER: -% issn,%: Include ISSN - %: (def) No ISSN -%-------------------- -%DOI NUMBER: -% doi,%: Include DOI - url-doi,%: Format DOI as URL //dx.doi.org/doi -% agu-doi,doi,%: Insert DOI AGU style -% %: (def) No DOI -%-------------------- -%`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS): - %: (def) Word `editor' after name -% edpar,%: `Name (editor),' -% edpar,bkedcap,%: `Name (Editor),' -% edparc,%: `Name, (editor)' -% edparc,bkedcap,%: `Name, (Editor)' -% edparxc,%: `Name (editor)' -% edparxc,bkedcap,%: `Name (Editor)' -%-------------------- -%EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS: - %: (def) Same as for edited book -% edby,%: In booktitle, edited by .. -% edby-par,%: In booktitle (edited by ..) -% edby-parc,%: In booktitle, (edited by ..) -% edby,edbyx,%: In booktitle, editor .. -% edby,edbyw,%: In booktitle, (editor) .. -% edby-par,edbyx,%: In booktitle (editor..) -% edby-parc,edbyx,%: In booktitle, (editor..) -% edby,edbyy,%: In booktitle, .., editor -% edby-par,edbyy,%: In booktitle (.., editor) -%-------------------- -%CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY' (if editor capitalizable) -% %: (def) `(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)' -% edcap,%: `(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)' -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS): - %: (def) \newblock after blocks -% blk-com,%: Comma between blocks -% blk-com,com-semi,%: Semi-colon between blocks -% blk-com,com-blank,%: Blanks between blocks -% blk-tit,%: Period after titles of articles, books, etc -% blk-tit,tit-col,%: Colon after titles of articles, books, etc -% blk-tita,%: Period after titles of articles -% blk-tita,tit-col,%: Colon after titles of articles -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES (if not using \newblock) -% %: (def) Notes have regular punctuation -% blknt,%: Notes preceded by period -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS: - %: (def) Author block normal -% au-col,%: Author block with colon -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN': - %: (def) Space after `in' -% in-col,%: Colon after `in' -% in-it,%: Italic `in' -% in-col,in-it,%: Italic `in' and colon -% in-x,%: No word `in' -%-------------------- -%`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES (if using 'in' with collections) - %: (def) No `in' before journal name -% injnl,%: Add `in' before journal name -%-------------------- -%FINAL PUNCTUATION: - %: (def) Period at very end -% fin-bare,%: No period at end -%-------------------- -%ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' (if not using external language file) -% %: (def) `Page(s)' -% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated -% ppx,%: `Page' omitted -%-------------------- -%ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS': -% %: (def) `Editor(s)' -% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated -%-------------------- -%OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: -% %: (def) No abbreviations -% abr,%: Abbreviations -%-------------------- -%ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' (if abbreviating words) -% %: (def) `Edition' abbreviated as `edn' -% ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' -%-------------------- -%MONTHS WITH DOTS: -% %: (def) Months with dots -% mth-bare,%: Months without dots -%-------------------- -%EDITION NUMBERS: -% xedn,%: Editions as in database -% %: (def) Write out editions -% ord,%: Numerical editions -%-------------------- -%Reading external language file \cfile=cjs-rcs-english.mbs - english,%: English language -%ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' - %: (def) `Page(s)' -% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated -% ppx,%: `Page' omitted -%-------------------- -%ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS': - %: (def) `Editor(s)' -% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated -%-------------------- -%OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: -% %: (def) No abbreviations - abr,%: Abbreviations -%-------------------- -%ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' (if abbreviating words) -% %: (def) `Edition' abbreviated as `edn' - ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' -%-------------------- -%MONTHS WITH DOTS: - %: (def) Months with dots -% mth-bare,%: Months without dots -%-------------------- -%EDITION NUMBERS: -% xedn,%: Editions as in database -% %: (def) Write out editions - ord,%: Numerical editions -%-------------------- -%STORED JOURNAL NAMES: - %: (def) Full journal names -% jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names -% jabr,jaa,%: Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands -%-------------------- -%AMPERSAND: - %: (def) Use word `and' -% amper,%: Use ampersand -% varand,%: Use \BIBand -%-------------------- -%COMMA BEFORE `AND': - %: (def) Comma before `and' -% and-xcom,%: No comma before `and' -% and-com,%: Comma even with 2 authors -%-------------------- -%COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS (if using comma before `and' with authors) -% and-com-ed,%: Comma with 2 editors -% %: (def) Two editors without comma -%-------------------- -%NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST: - %: (def) With `and' -% xand,%: No `and' -%-------------------- -%COMMA BEFORE `ET AL': -% %: (def) Comma before `et al' - etal-xc,%: No comma before `et al' -%-------------------- -%FONT OF `ET AL': - %: (def) Plain et al -% etal-it,%: Italic et al -% etal-rm,%: Roman et al -%-------------------- -%ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: - %: (def) No additional fields -% revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,%: Include REVTeX data fields -%-------------------- -%E-PRINT DATA FIELD: (without REVTeX fields) - %: (def) Do not include eprint field -% eprint,%: Include eprint and archive fields -%-------------------- -%URL ADDRESS: (without REVTeX fields) -% %: (def) No URL - url,url-blk,%: Include URL -% url,url-nt,%: URL as note -% url,url-nl,%: URL on new line -%-------------------- -%REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS: - %: (def) No reference component tags -% bibinfo,%: Reference component tags -%-------------------- -%EMPHASIS: (affects all so-called italics) - %: (def) Use emphasis -% em-it,%: Use true italics -% em-x,%: No italics -% em-ul,%: Underlining -%-------------------- -%COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX: - nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands -% plntx,%: Use only Plain TeX -%-------------------- -,{% - }} -\generate{\file{cjs-rcs-en.bst}{\MBopts}} -\endbatchfile diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj deleted file mode 100644 index 3ae793cf2bf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj +++ /dev/null @@ -1,603 +0,0 @@ -%% Driver file to produce cjs-rcs-fr.bst from cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs -%% Originally generated with makebst, version 4.1 (2003/09/08), -%% on 2023/10/11 at 12:01, then hand edited by Vincent Goulet. -%% -\input docstrip - -\preamble - -Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société -canadienne de statistique - -This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions -of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this -license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version -of this license is in: - - https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet -<vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>. - -This work consists of the master bibliographic style file -cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs, the language definition file cjs-rcs-french.mbs, -the driver file cjs-rcs-fr.dbj, and the derived file cjs-rcs-fr.bst. - -\endpreamble - -\postamble -End of customized bst file -\endpostamble - -\keepsilent - -\askforoverwritefalse -\def\MBopts{\from{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}{% -%EXTERNAL FILES: -%Name of language file: \cfile=cjs-rcs-french.mbs. -%No included files. - head,\MBopta} -\from{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}{\MBopta} -\from{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}} -\def\MBopta{% -%INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT (if no external language file) -% %: (def) English -% babel,%: Babel -%-------------------- - exlang,%: External language file -%STYLE OF CITATIONS: -% %: (def) Numerical - ay,%: Author-year -% alph,%: Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90 -% alph,alf-1,%: Alpha style, Jon90 -% alph,alf-f,%: Alpha style, Jones90 -% cite,%: Cite key -%-------------------- -%HTML OUTPUT (if non author-year citations) -% %: (def) Normal LaTeX -% html,%: Hypertext -% html,htlist,%: Hypertext list -% html,htdes,%: Hypertext with keys -%-------------------- -%AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM (if author-year citations) - nat,%: Natbib -% %: (def) Older Natbib -% alk,%: Apalike -% har,%: Harvard -% ast,%: Astronomy -% cay,%: Chicago -% nmd,%: Named -% cn,%: Author-date -%-------------------- -%HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED (if Harvard support selected) -% harnm,%: With Harvard extensions -% %: (def) Older Harvard -%-------------------- -%LANGUAGE FIELD -% %: (def) No language field - lang,%: Add language field -%-------------------- -%ANNOTATIONS: - %: (def) No annotations -% annote,%: Annotations -%-------------------- -%PRESENTATIONS: - %: (def) Do not add presentation type -% pres,%: Add presentation, speaker not highlighted -% pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face -% pres,pres-it,%: Presentaion, speaker italic -% pres,pres-sc,%: Presentaion, speaker in small caps -%-------------------- -%ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if non-author/year and non-alph) -% %: (def) Alphabetical -% seq-no,%: Citation order -% seq-yr,%: Year ordered -% seq-yrr,%: Reverse year ordered -%-------------------- -%ORDERING OF REFERENCES (if author-year citations) - %: (def) Alphabetical -% seq-lab,%: By label -% seq-labc,%: By label and cite order -% seq-key,%: By label and cite key -% seq-yr,%: Year ordered -% seq-yrr,%: Reverse year ordered -% seq-no,%: Citation order -%-------------------- -%ORDER ON VON PART (if not citation order) -% %: (def) Sort on von part - vonx,%: Sort without von part -%-------------------- -%IGNORE FIRST NAMES (if author-year citations) - %: (def) Respect first names -% xintls,%: Sort on surname only -%-------------------- -%AUTHOR NAMES: -% ed-au,%: Full, surname last -% nm-revf,%: Full, surname first -% nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname -% nm-rev,%: Surname + initials -% nm-rv,%: Surname + dotless initials -% nm-rvvc,%: Surname + comma + spaceless initials -% nm-rvx,%: Surname + pure initials -% nm-rvcx,%: Surname + comma + pure initials -% nm-rvv,%: Surname + spaceless initials - nm-rev1,%: Only first name reversed, initials -% nm-revv1,%: First name reversed, with full names -%-------------------- -%EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS (if author names reversed) - %: (def) Editor names NOT reversed -% ed-rev,%: Editor names reversed -%-------------------- -%POSITION OF JUNIOR (if author names reversed) - jnrlst,%: Junior comes last -% %: (def) Junior between -%-------------------- -%JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION (if author-year citations) - %: (def) No `junior' part in the citations -% jnrlab,%: `Junior' in citations -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES: - %: (def) Author names separated by commas -% aunm-semi,%: Names separated by semi-colon -% aunm-sl,%: Names separated by slash -%-------------------- -%ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES: - %: (def) Author/editor names always present -% nmdash,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash -% nmdash,nmd-2,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes -% nmdash,nmd-3,%: Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes -%-------------------- -%NUMBER OF AUTHORS IN BIBLIOGRAPHY: - %: (def) All authors -% nmlm,%: Limited authors -%-------------------- -%AUTHORS IN CITATIONS: - %: (def) One author et al -% mcite,%: Some other truncation scheme -%-------------------- -%MAX AUTHORS BEFORE ET AL: (if regular cite not selected) -% mct-1,%: One et al -% mct-2,%: One, Two et al -% mct-3,%: One, Two, Three et al -% mct-4,%: One, Two, Three, Four et al -% mct-5,%: One, Two, Three, Four, Five et al -% mct-6,%: One, Two, Three, Four, Five, Six et al -%-------------------- -%MAX AUTHORS WITHOUT ET AL: (if regular cite not selected) -% mct-x2,%: Two authors without truncating -% mct-x3,%: Three authors -% mct-x4,%: Four authors -% mct-x5,%: Five authors -% mct-x6,%: Six authors -%-------------------- -%TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES: - %: (def) Normal font for author names -% nmft,nmft-sc,%: Small caps authors -% nmft,nmft-it,%: Italic authors -% nmft,nmft-bf,%: Bold authors -% nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font -%-------------------- -%FONT FOR FIRST NAMES (if non-default font for authors) -% %: (def) First names same font as surnames -% fnm-rm,%: First names in normal font -% fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font -%-------------------- -%EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC: -% %: (def) Editors incollection normal font -% nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors -%-------------------- -%FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST: -% %: (def) `And' in author font -% nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font -%-------------------- -%FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT (if author-year citations) - %: (def) Cited authors plain -% lab,lab-it,%: Cited authors italic -% lab,lab-sc,%: Cited authors small caps -% lab,lab-bf,%: Cited authors bold -% lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font -%-------------------- -%FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS (if non-default font for citation lables) -% %: (def) Cited `and' in author font -% and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font -%-------------------- -%FONT OF EXTRA LABEL (The extra letter on the year) - %: (def) Extra label plain -% xlab-it,%: Extra label italic -%-------------------- -%LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING (if author-year citations) - keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author -% %: (def) Year included when KEY replaces missing author -%-------------------- -%MISSING DATE (if author-year citations) -% %: (def) Missing date set to ???? - blkyear,%: Missing date left blank -%-------------------- -%DATE POSITION: -% %: (def) Date at end - dt-beg,%: Date after authors -% dt-jnl,%: Date part of journal spec. -% dt-end,%: Date at very end -%-------------------- -%DATE FORMAT (if non author-year citations) -% %: (def) Plain month and year -% yr-par,%: Date in parentheses -% yr-brk,%: Date in brackets -% yr-col,%: Date preceded by colon -% yr-per,%: Date preceded by period -% yr-com,%: Date preceded by comma -% yr-blk,%: Date preceded by space -%-------------------- -%SUPPRESS MONTH: -% %: (def) Date is month and year -% xmth,%: Date is year only -%-------------------- -%REVERSED DATE (if including month) -% %: (def) Date as month year -% dtrev,%: Date as year month -%-------------------- -%DATE FORMAT (if author-year citations) -% %: (def) Year plain -% yr-par,%: Year in parentheses -% yr-brk,%: Year in brackets -% yr-col,%: Year preceded by colon - yr-per,%: Year preceded by period -% yr-com,%: Date preceded by comma -% yr-blk,%: Year preceded by space -%-------------------- -%INCLUDE MONTHS: - %: (def) Date is year only -% aymth,%: Include month in date -%-------------------- -%REVERSED DATE (if including month) -% %: (def) Date as month year -% dtrev,%: Date as year month -%-------------------- -%DATE PUNCTUATION (if date not at end) - %: (def) Date with standard block punctuation -% yrp-col,%: Colon after date -% yrp-semi,%: Semi-colon after date -% yrp-per,%: Period after date -% yrp-x,%: No punct. after date -%-------------------- -%BLANK AFTER DATE: - %: (def) Space after date -% yrpp-xsp,%: No space after date -%-------------------- -%DATE FONT: - %: (def) Date in normal font -% dtbf,%: Date in bold face -%-------------------- -%TRUNCATE YEAR (if author-year citations) - note-yr,%: Year text full -% %: (def) Year truncated -%-------------------- -%TITLE OF ARTICLE: -% %: (def) Title plain -% tit-it,%: Title italic -% tit-qq,qt-s,%: Title and punctuation in single quotes -% tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes -% tit-qq,qt-g,%: Title and punctuation in guillemets -% tit-qq,qt-s,qx,%: Title in single quotes -% tit-qq,qx,%: Title in double quotes - tit-qq,qt-g,qx,%: Title in guillemets -%-------------------- -%COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES (if quoted title) -% bt-qq,%: Quote collection and proceedings titles - %: (def) Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes -%-------------------- -%CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE: - %: (def) Sentence style -% atit-u,%: Title style -%-------------------- -%ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT: - %: (def) Article title present -% jtit-x,%: No article title -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL NAMES: - %: (def) Periods in journal names -% jxper,%: Dotless journal names -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL NAME FONT: - %: (def) Journal name italics -% jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal -%-------------------- -%THESIS TITLE: - %: (def) Thesis titles like books -% thtit-a,%: Thesis title like article -% thtit-x,%: No thesis title -%-------------------- -%TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE: -% %: (def) Tech. report title like articles - trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books -%-------------------- -%TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER: - %: (def) Tech. report and number plain -% trnum-it,%: Tech. report and number italic -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL VOLUME: - %: (def) Volume plain -% vol-it,%: Volume italic -% vol-bf,%: Volume bold -% vol-2bf,%: Volume and number bold -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER: -% %: (def) Journal vol(num) -% vnum-sp,%: Journal vol (num) -% vnum-cm,%: Journal vol, num - vnum-nr,%: Journal vol, no. num -% vnum-h,%: Journal vol, \# number -% vnum-b,%: Journal vol number -% vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number -%-------------------- -%VOLUME PUNCTUATION: -% %: (def) Volume with colon -% volp-sp,%: Volume with colon and space -% volp-semi,%: Volume with semi-colon - volp-com,%: Volume with comma -% volp-blk,%: Volume with blank -%-------------------- -%YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION: - %: (def) Journal year like others -% jdt-v,%: Journal vol(year) -% jdt-vs,%: Journal vol (year) -% jdt-p,%: Year with pages -% jdt-pc,%: Year, comma, pages -%-------------------- -%PAGE NUMBERS: - %: (def) Start and stop page numbers -% jpg-1,%: Only start page number -%-------------------- -%LARGE PAGE NUMBERS: -% %: (def) No separators for large page numbers -% pgsep-c,%: Comma inserted over 9999 - pgsep-s,%: Thin space inserted over 9999 -% pgsep-p,%: Period inserted over 9999 -%-------------------- -%WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES: -% %: (def) Article pages numbers only - jwdpg,%: Include `page' in articles -%-------------------- -%POSITION OF PAGES: - %: (def) Pages given mid text -% pp-last,%: Pages at end -%-------------------- -%WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES: -% %: (def) Article volume as number only - jwdvol,%: Include `volume' in articles -%-------------------- -%NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS: - num-xser,%: Allows number without series -% %: (def) Standard BibTeX -%-------------------- -%POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES: -% %: (def) After chapter and pages - numser,%: Just before publisher -%-------------------- -%VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS: -% %: (def) Vol. 23 of Series - ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23 -%-------------------- -%POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS: -% %: (def) Series and volume after the editors - ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle -%-------------------- -%JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION: - %: (def) Comma after journal -% jnm-x,%: Space after journal -%-------------------- -%BOOK TITLE: - %: (def) Book title italic -% btit-rm,bt-rm,%: Book title plain -%-------------------- -%PAGES IN BOOKS: - %: (def) Pages in book plain -% bkpg-par,%: Pages in book in parentheses -% bkpg-x,%: Pages in book bare -%-------------------- -%TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK: -% %: (def) Total book pages not printed - pg-bk,%: For book: 345 pages -% pg-bk,pg-pre,%: Total book pages before publisher -%-------------------- -%PUBLISHER ADDRESS: - %: (def) Publisher, address -% add-pub,%: Address: Publisher -%-------------------- -%PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES: - %: (def) Publisher as normal block -% pub-par,%: Publisher in parentheses -% pub-date,%: Publisher and date in parentheses -% pub-date,pub-xc,%: Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma -% pub-date,pub-xpar,%: Publisher and date without parentheses -% pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc,%: Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma -%-------------------- -%PUBLISHER POSITION: -% %: (def) Publisher after chapter, pages - pre-pub,%: Publisher before chapter, pages - pre-edn,%: Publisher after edition -%-------------------- -%ISBN NUMBER: - isbn,%: Include ISBN -% %: (def) No ISBN -%-------------------- -%ISSN NUMBER: -% issn,%: Include ISSN - %: (def) No ISSN -%-------------------- -%DOI NUMBER: -% doi,%: Include DOI - url-doi,%: Format DOI as URL //doi.org/doi -% agu-doi,doi,%: Insert DOI AGU style -% %: (def) No DOI -%-------------------- -%`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS): -% %: (def) Word `editor' after name -% edpar,%: `Name (editor),' -% edpar,bkedcap,%: `Name (Editor),' -% edparc,%: `Name, (editor)' -% edparc,bkedcap,%: `Name, (Editor)' - edparxc,%: `Name (editor)' -% edparxc,bkedcap,%: `Name (Editor)' -%-------------------- -%EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS: -% %: (def) Same as for edited book - edby,%: In booktitle, edited by .. -% edby-par,%: In booktitle (edited by ..) -% edby-parc,%: In booktitle, (edited by ..) -% edby,edbyx,%: In booktitle, editor .. -% edby,edbyw,%: In booktitle, (editor) .. -% edby-par,edbyx,%: In booktitle (editor..) -% edby-parc,edbyx,%: In booktitle, (editor..) -% edby,edbyy,%: In booktitle, .., editor -% edby-par,edbyy,%: In booktitle (.., editor) -%-------------------- -%CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY' (if editor capitalizable) -% %: (def) `(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)' -% edcap,%: `(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)' -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS): -% %: (def) \newblock after blocks - blk-com,%: Comma between blocks -% blk-com,com-semi,%: Semi-colon between blocks -% blk-com,com-blank,%: Blanks between blocks -% blk-tit,%: Period after titles of articles, books, etc -% blk-tit,tit-col,%: Colon after titles of articles, books, etc -% blk-tita,%: Period after titles of articles -% blk-tita,tit-col,%: Colon after titles of articles -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES (if not using \newblock) -% %: (def) Notes have regular punctuation - blknt,%: Notes preceded by period -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS: - %: (def) Author block normal -% au-col,%: Author block with colon -%-------------------- -%PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN': - %: (def) Space after `in' -% in-col,%: Colon after `in' -% in-it,%: Italic `in' -% in-col,in-it,%: Italic `in' and colon -% in-x,%: No word `in' -%-------------------- -%`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES (if using 'in' with collections) - %: (def) No `in' before journal name -% injnl,%: Add `in' before journal name -%-------------------- -%FINAL PUNCTUATION: - %: (def) Period at very end -% fin-bare,%: No period at end -%-------------------- -%ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' (if not using external language file) -% %: (def) `Page(s)' -% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated -% ppx,%: `Page' omitted -%-------------------- -%ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS': -% %: (def) `Editor(s)' -% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated -%-------------------- -%OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: -% %: (def) No abbreviations -% abr,%: Abbreviations -%-------------------- -%ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' (if abbreviating words) -% %: (def) `Edition' abbreviated as `edn' -% ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' -%-------------------- -%MONTHS WITH DOTS: -% %: (def) Months with dots -% mth-bare,%: Months without dots -%-------------------- -%EDITION NUMBERS: -% xedn,%: Editions as in database -% %: (def) Write out editions -% ord,%: Numerical editions -%-------------------- -%Reading external language file \cfile=cjs-rcs-french.mbs - french,%: French language -%ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES': -% %: (def) `Page(s)' - pp,%: `Page' abbreviated -% ppx,%: `Page' omitted -%-------------------- -%ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITEUR: -% %: (def) `\'Editeur(s)' - ed,%: `\'Editeur' abbreviated -%-------------------- -%OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: -% %: (def) No abbreviations - abr,%: Abbreviations -%-------------------- -%EDITION NUMBERS: -% xedn,%: Editions as in database -% %: (def) Write out editions - ord,%: Numerical editions -%-------------------- -%STORED JOURNAL NAMES: - %: (def) Full journal names -% jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names -% jabr,jaa,%: Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands -%-------------------- -%AMPERSAND: - %: (def) Use word `and' -% amper,%: Use ampersand -% varand,%: Use \BIBand -%-------------------- -%COMMA BEFORE `AND': -% %: (def) Comma before `and' - and-xcom,%: No comma before `and' -% and-com,%: Comma even with 2 authors -%-------------------- -%COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS (if using comma before `and' with authors) -% and-com-ed,%: Comma with 2 editors -% %: (def) Two editors without comma -%-------------------- -%NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST: - %: (def) With `and' -% xand,%: No `and' -%-------------------- -%COMMA BEFORE `ET AL': -% %: (def) Comma before `et al' - etal-xc,%: No comma before `et al' -%-------------------- -%FONT OF `ET AL': - %: (def) Plain et al -% etal-it,%: Italic et al -% etal-rm,%: Roman et al -%-------------------- -%ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: - %: (def) No additional fields -% revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,%: Include REVTeX data fields -%-------------------- -%E-PRINT DATA FIELD: (without REVTeX fields) - %: (def) Do not include eprint field -% eprint,%: Include eprint and archive fields -%-------------------- -%URL ADDRESS: (without REVTeX fields) -% %: (def) No URL - url,url-blk,%: Include URL -% url,url-nt,%: URL as note -% url,url-nl,%: URL on new line -%-------------------- -%REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS: - %: (def) No reference component tags -% bibinfo,%: Reference component tags -%-------------------- -%EMPHASIS: (affects all so-called italics) - %: (def) Use emphasis -% em-it,%: Use true italics -% em-x,%: No italics -% em-ul,%: Underlining -%-------------------- -%COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX: - nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands -% plntx,%: Use only Plain TeX -%-------------------- -,{% - }} -\generate{\file{cjs-rcs-fr.bst}{\MBopts}} -\endbatchfile diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-class.dbj b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-class.dbj deleted file mode 100644 index c987b1e6a7d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-class.dbj +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -\input docstrip.tex -\keepsilent -\askforoverwritefalse -\nopostamble -\preamble - -This is a generated file. - -Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société -canadienne de statistique - -This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions -of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this -license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version -of this license is in: - - https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt - -and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -version 2006/05/20 or later. - -This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. - -The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet -<vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>. - -This work consists of the file cjs-rcs-article.dtx and the derived -files cjs-rcs-article.cls, cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex, cjs-template.tex -and rcs-gabarit.tex. - -\endpreamble - -\generate{ - \file{cjs-rcs-article.cls}{\from{cjs-rcs-article.dtx}{class}} - \file{cjs-rcs-article-fr.tex}{\nopreamble\from{cjs-rcs-article.dtx}{fr-doc}} - \file{cjs-template.tex}{\nopreamble\from{cjs-rcs-article.dtx}{template,en}} - \file{rcs-gabarit.tex}{\nopreamble\from{cjs-rcs-article.dtx}{template,fr}} -} -\endbatchfile diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-english.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-english.mbs deleted file mode 100644 index e786d500bde..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-english.mbs +++ /dev/null @@ -1,420 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -*- mode: doctex -*- -% -% English language definition file of the master bibliography style -% for The Canadian Journal of Statistics | La revue canadienne de -% statistique -% -% Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société -% canadienne de statistique -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions -% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this -% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version -% of this license is in: -% -% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet -% <vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>. -% -% This work derives from english.mbs, part of the custom-bib -% collection, a contribution to the LaTeX2e system. -% Copyright 1994-2002 Patrick W Daly -% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung -% Max-Planck-Str. 2 -% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau -% Germany -% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de -% - %------------------------------------------------------------------- - % Begin module: -%\fi - % \ProvidesFile{cjs-rcs-english.mbs}[2023/11/29 v1.0 (VG, PWD)] -%\iffalse -%<*a&!a> -% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst -% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} ! -\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else - \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx -%</a&!a> -%<*driver> -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% -\documentclass[nocjs,x11names,french,english]{cjs-rcs-article} - - %% Loading doc.sty creates some conflicts with the class and memoir. We - %% need to: - %% - %% - keep a copy of the class' \maketitle command; - %% - undefine the 'glossary' environment created by memoir; - %% - restore the standard LaTeX commands for the glossary that - %% doc.sty relies upon. - \let\makeCJStitle\maketitle % keep class definition - \let\theglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty - \let\endtheglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty - \makeatletter - \def\makeglossary{% - \newwrite\@glossaryfile - \immediate\openout\@glossaryfile=\jobname.glo - \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup - \@sanitize - \@wrglossary}\typeout - {Writing glossary file \jobname.glo }% - \let\makeglossary\@empty - } - \@onlypreamble\makeglossary - \def\@wrglossary#1{% - \protected@write\@glossaryfile{}% - {\string\glossaryentry{#1}{\thepage}}% - \endgroup - \@esphack} - \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index} - \@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse % turn off twoside option - \makeatother - \usepackage{doc} - \def\changes#1#2#3{\glossary{#1>#3}} % simplified - \DisableCrossrefs - \CodelineNumbered - \RecordChanges - \OnlyDescription - \DontCheckModules - - \AtEndPreamble{% - \hypersetup{% - pdfauthor = {Statistical Society of Canada}, - pdftitle = {French language definition file cjs-rcs-french.mbs}}} - - %% Configuration of the glossary - \addto\extrasenglish{% - \def\glossaryname{Version history}} - \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{\glossaryname}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\glossaryname}} - \setlength{\GlossaryMin}{5cm} - - %% Additional semantic typesetting - \newcommand*\class[1]{\textsf{#1}} - \newcommand*\dtx{\textsf{docstrip}} - - %% Name of the journal - \makeatletter - \newcommand*\TheCJS{\@ifstar{\emph{The Journal}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@en}}} - \newcommand*\LaRevue{\@ifstar{\emph{La revue}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@fr}}} - \newcommand*\CJSclass{\class{cjs-rcs-article}} - \newcommand*\CJSbsten{\texttt{cjs-rcs-en.bst}} - \newcommand*\CJSbstfr{\texttt{cjs-rcs-fr.bst}} - \makeatother - - %% Redefine \year using information from \filedate instead of using - %% compilation time - \def\parsedate#1/#2/#3\relax{\def\year{#1}} - - \MakeShortVerb{\|} - -\begin{document} - \DocInput{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% end of meta-comment \fi -% \GetFileInfo{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} -% \expandafter\parsedate\filedate\relax -% -% \changes{0.9}{2023-10-14}{Initial version based on version 4.2 of -% \texttt{english.mbs} from \textbf{custom-bib}.} -% \changes{0.93}{2023-11-06}{Add a prefix v in the version number like -% the main file.} -% \changes{1.0}{2023-11-29}{First official release distributed through -% CTAN.} -% -% \title[English language definition file \filename]{% -% English language definition file \\ -% of the master bibliographic style file \\ -% for \TheCJS} -% \author{Statistical Society of Canada} -% \affil{Developed by Vincent Goulet, Université Laval} -% -% \begin{englishabstract} -% The list of references in {\TheCJS} is typeset using the -% bibliographic styles {\CJSbsten} for articles in English and -% {\CJSbstfr} for articles in French. These styles are created using -% the program \texttt{makebst} from the master bibliographic file -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}, and the language definition files -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} and \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}. -% \end{englishabstract} -% \begin{frenchabstract} -% La liste des références dans {\LaRevue} est composée avec les -% style de bibliographie {\CJSbstfr} pour les articles en français -% et {\CJSbsten} pour les articles en anglais. Ceux-ci sont générés -% par le programme \texttt{makebst} à partir du fichier maitre -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs} et des fichiers de localisation -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} et \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}. -% \end{frenchabstract} -% -% ^^A abusing the 'classification' environment. The final period is -% ^^A added by the environment. -% \begin{classification}[Version] -% \item[] This is the documentation for the file \code{\filename} -% {\fileversion}, dated {\filedate} -% \end{classification} -% -% \licence{{\year}, Statistical Society of Canada~{\textbar}~Société -% canadienne de statistique} -% -% \makeCJStitle -% -% \section{Introduction} -% -% This file is to be used as a language definition file with the -% master bibliographic file for {\TheCJS}. The language it defines is -% English. -% -% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may -% be used together with one that contains language support via -% external definition files. -% -% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details. -% -% \section{The Menu Information} -% -% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options -% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is -% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>| -% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to -% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*options> -\mes{^^JOptions for ENGLISH} -\wr{\spsp\spsp english,\pc: English language} - -\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'}{} -\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} -\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.} -\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{} -\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} -\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc} -\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' - (if abbreviating words)} - {\if\ans a*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{} -\optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{} -\getans -\beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.} -\optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{} -\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory} -\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc} -\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptions -%</options> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges} -% -% \section{The Coding} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!options&!driver> - - % The language selected here is ENGLISH -FUNCTION {bbl.and} -{ "and"} - -FUNCTION {bbl.etal} -{ "et~al." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.editors} -%<!ed>{ "editors" } -%<ed>{ "eds." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.editor} -%<!ed>{ "editor" } -%<ed>{ "ed." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.edby} -{ "edited by" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.edition} -%<!abr>{ "edition" } -%<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." } -%<abr&ednx>{ "ed." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.volume} -%<!abr>{ "volume" } -%<abr>{ "vol." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.of} -{ "of" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.number} -%<!abr>{ "number" } -%<abr>{ "no." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.nr} -{ "no." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.in} -{ "in" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.pages} -%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" } -%<pp>{ "pp." } -%<!pp&ppx>{ "" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.page} -%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" } -%<pp>{ "p." } -%<!pp&ppx>{ "" } - -%<*revdata> -FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp} -{ "pages" } - -%</revdata> -FUNCTION {bbl.chapter} -%<!abr>{ "chapter" } -%<abr>{ "chap." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.techrep} -%<!abr>{ "Technical Report" } -%<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis} -{ "Master's thesis" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis} -{ "Ph.D. thesis" } - -%<*!xedn> -FUNCTION {bbl.first} -%<!ord>{ "First" } -%<ord>{ "1st" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.second} -%<!ord>{ "Second" } -%<ord>{ "2nd" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.third} -%<!ord>{ "Third" } -%<ord>{ "3rd" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.fourth} -%<!ord>{ "Fourth" } -%<ord>{ "4th" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.fifth} -%<!ord>{ "Fifth" } -%<ord>{ "5th" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.st} -{ "st" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.nd} -{ "nd" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.rd} -{ "rd" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.th} -{ "th" } -% \end{macrocode} -% This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if -% the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits. -% So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is -% sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further -% languages. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {eng.ord} -{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ * - #-2 #1 substring$ "1" = - { bbl.th * } - { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "1" = - { pop$ bbl.st * } - { duplicate$ "2" = - { pop$ bbl.nd * } - { "3" = - { bbl.rd * } - { bbl.th * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -%</!xedn> -%<*!abr> -MACRO {jan} {"January"} - -MACRO {feb} {"February"} - -MACRO {mar} {"March"} - -MACRO {apr} {"April"} - -MACRO {may} {"May"} - -MACRO {jun} {"June"} - -MACRO {jul} {"July"} - -MACRO {aug} {"August"} - -MACRO {sep} {"September"} - -MACRO {oct} {"October"} - -MACRO {nov} {"November"} - -MACRO {dec} {"December"} - -%</!abr> -%<*abr> -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} - -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} - -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} - -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} - -MACRO {may} {"May"} - -MACRO {jun} {"Jun."} - -MACRO {jul} {"Jul."} - -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} - -MACRO {sep} {"Sep."} - -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} - -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} - -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} - -%</abr> -%</!options&!driver> - % End module: cjs-rcs-english.mbs -% \end{macrocode} -% \Finale diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-french.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-french.mbs deleted file mode 100644 index eb60ab8a202..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-french.mbs +++ /dev/null @@ -1,370 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -*- mode: doctex -*- -% -% French language definition file of the master bibliography style for -% The Canadian Journal of Statistics | La revue canadienne de -% statistique -% -% Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société -% canadienne de statistique -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions -% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this -% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version -% of this license is in: -% -% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet -% <vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>. -% -% This work derives from french.mbs, part of the custom-bib -% collection, a contribution to the LaTeX2e system. -% Copyright 1994-2002 Patrick W Daly -% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung -% Max-Planck-Str. 2 -% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau -% Germany -% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de -% - %------------------------------------------------------------------- - % Begin module: -%\fi - % \ProvidesFile{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}[2023/11/29 v1.0 (VG, PWD)] -%\iffalse -%<*a&!a> -% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst -% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} ! -\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else - \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx -%</a&!a> -%<*driver> -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% -\documentclass[nocjs,x11names,french,english]{cjs-rcs-article} - - %% Loading doc.sty creates some conflicts with the class and memoir. We - %% need to: - %% - %% - keep a copy of the class' \maketitle command; - %% - undefine the 'glossary' environment created by memoir; - %% - restore the standard LaTeX commands for the glossary that - %% doc.sty relies upon. - \let\makeCJStitle\maketitle % keep class definition - \let\theglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty - \let\endtheglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty - \makeatletter - \def\makeglossary{% - \newwrite\@glossaryfile - \immediate\openout\@glossaryfile=\jobname.glo - \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup - \@sanitize - \@wrglossary}\typeout - {Writing glossary file \jobname.glo }% - \let\makeglossary\@empty - } - \@onlypreamble\makeglossary - \def\@wrglossary#1{% - \protected@write\@glossaryfile{}% - {\string\glossaryentry{#1}{\thepage}}% - \endgroup - \@esphack} - \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index} - \@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse % turn off twoside option - \makeatother - \usepackage{doc} - \def\changes#1#2#3{\glossary{#1>#3}} % simplified - \DisableCrossrefs - \CodelineNumbered - \RecordChanges - \OnlyDescription - \DontCheckModules - - \AtEndPreamble{% - \hypersetup{% - pdfauthor = {Statistical Society of Canada}, - pdftitle = {French language definition file cjs-rcs-french.mbs}}} - - %% Configuration of the glossary - \addto\extrasenglish{% - \def\glossaryname{Version history}} - \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{\glossaryname}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\glossaryname}} - \setlength{\GlossaryMin}{5cm} - - %% Additional semantic typesetting - \newcommand*\class[1]{\textsf{#1}} - \newcommand*\dtx{\textsf{docstrip}} - - %% Name of the journal - \makeatletter - \newcommand*\TheCJS{\@ifstar{\emph{The Journal}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@en}}} - \newcommand*\LaRevue{\@ifstar{\emph{La revue}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@fr}}} - \newcommand*\CJSclass{\class{cjs-rcs-article}} - \newcommand*\CJSbsten{\texttt{cjs-rcs-en.bst}} - \newcommand*\CJSbstfr{\texttt{cjs-rcs-fr.bst}} - \makeatother - - %% Redefine \year using information from \filedate instead of using - %% compilation time - \def\parsedate#1/#2/#3\relax{\def\year{#1}} - - \MakeShortVerb{\|} - -\begin{document} - \DocInput{cjs-rcs-french.mbs} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% end of meta-comment \fi -% \GetFileInfo{cjs-rcs-french.mbs} -% \expandafter\parsedate\filedate\relax -% -% \changes{0.9}{2023-10-14}{Initial version based on version 4.2 of -% \texttt{french.mbs} from \textbf{custom-bib}.} -% \changes{0.93}{2023-11-06}{Add a prefix v in the version number like -% the main file.} -% \changes{1.0}{2023-11-29}{First official release distributed through -% CTAN.} -% -% \title[French language definition file \filename]{% -% French language definition file \\ -% of the master bibliographic style file \\ -% for \TheCJS} -% \author{Statistical Society of Canada} -% \affil{Developed by Vincent Goulet, Université Laval} -% -% \begin{englishabstract} -% The list of references in {\TheCJS} is typeset using the -% bibliographic styles {\CJSbsten} for articles in English and -% {\CJSbstfr} for articles in French. These styles are created using -% the program \texttt{makebst} from the master bibliographic file -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}, and the language definition files -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} and \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}. -% \end{englishabstract} -% \begin{frenchabstract} -% La liste des références dans {\LaRevue} est composée avec les -% style de bibliographie {\CJSbstfr} pour les articles en français -% et {\CJSbsten} pour les articles en anglais. Ceux-ci sont générés -% par le programme \texttt{makebst} à partir du fichier maitre -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs} et des fichiers de localisation -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} et \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}. -% \end{frenchabstract} -% -% ^^A abusing the 'classification' environment. The final period is -% ^^A added by the environment. -% \begin{classification}[Version] -% \item[] This is the documentation for the file \code{\filename} -% {\fileversion}, dated {\filedate} -% \end{classification} -% -% \licence{{\year}, Statistical Society of Canada~{\textbar}~Société -% canadienne de statistique} -% -% \makeCJStitle -% -% \section{Introduction} -% -% This file is to be used as a language definition file with the -% master bibliographic file for {\TheCJS}. The language it defines is -% French. -% -% This is not a self-sufficient \texttt{.mbs} file, but rather may -% be used together with one that contains language support via -% external definition files. -% -% See the documentation for \texttt{makebst} for formatting details. -% -% \section{The Menu Information} -% -% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options -% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is -% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between |%<*!options&!driver>| -% \dots\ |%</!options&!driver>| in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to -% extract only the menu information or the documentation driver. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*options> -\mes{^^JOptions for FRENCH} -\wr{\spsp\spsp french,\pc: French language} - -\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES':}{} -\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} -\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.} -\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITEUR:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{`\string\'Editeur(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} -\optdef{a}{ed}{`\string\'Editeur' abbreviated}{as \string\'Ed.} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of Tome, \string\'edition, chapitre} -\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{} -\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory} -\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as premi\string\`ere, deuxi\string\`eme,...} -\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1re, 2e, 3e, etc} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptions -%</options> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges} -% -% \section{The Coding} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!options&!driver> - - % The language selected here is FRENCH -FUNCTION {bbl.and} -{ "et"} - -FUNCTION {bbl.etal} -{ "et~collab." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.editors} -%<!ed>{ "directeurs" } -%<ed>{ "dir." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.editor} -%<!ed>{ "directeur" } -%<ed>{ "dir." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.edby} -{ "sous la direction de" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.edition} -%<!abr>{ "\'edition" } -%<abr>{ "\'ed." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.volume} -%<!abr>{ "volume" } -%<abr>{ "vol." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.of} -{ "de" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.number} -%<!abr>{ "num\'ero" } -%<abr>{ "{\no}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.nr} -{ "{\no}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.in} -{ "dans" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.pages} -%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" } -%<pp>{ "p." } -%<!pp&ppx>{ "" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.page} -%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" } -%<pp>{ "p." } -%<!pp&ppx>{ "" } - -%<*revdata> -FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp} -{ "pages" } - -%</revdata> -FUNCTION {bbl.chapter} -%<!abr>{ "chapitre" } -%<abr>{ "chap." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.techrep} -%<!abr>{ "rapport technique" } -%<abr>{ "rapport technique" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis} -{ "m\'emoire de ma\^itrise" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis} -{ "th\`ese de doctorat" } - -%<*!xedn> -FUNCTION {bbl.first} -%<!ord>{ "Premi\`ere" } -%<ord>{ "1{\iere}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.second} -%<!ord>{ "Deuxi\`eme" } -%<ord>{ "2{\ieme}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.third} -%<!ord>{ "Troisi\`eme" } -%<ord>{ "3{\ieme}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.fourth} -%<!ord>{ "Quatri\`eme" } -%<ord>{ "4{\ieme}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.fifth} -%<!ord>{ "Cinqui\`eme" } -%<ord>{ "5{\ieme}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.th} -{ "{\ieme}" } - -%</!xedn> -%<*!abr> -MACRO {jan} {"janvier"} - -MACRO {feb} {"f\'evrier"} - -MACRO {mar} {"mars"} - -MACRO {apr} {"avril"} - -MACRO {may} {"mai"} - -MACRO {jun} {"juin"} - -MACRO {jul} {"juillet"} - -MACRO {aug} {"ao\^ut"} - -MACRO {sep} {"septembre"} - -MACRO {oct} {"octobre"} - -MACRO {nov} {"novembre"} - -MACRO {dec} {"d\'ecembre"} - -%</!abr> -%<*abr> -MACRO {jan} {"jan."} - -MACRO {feb} {"f\'ev."} - -MACRO {mar} {"mars"} - -MACRO {apr} {"avr."} - -MACRO {may} {"mai"} - -MACRO {jun} {"juin"} - -MACRO {jul} {"juil."} - -MACRO {aug} {"ao\^ut"} - -MACRO {sep} {"sept."} - -MACRO {oct} {"oct."} - -MACRO {nov} {"nov."} - -MACRO {dec} {"d\'ec."} - -%</abr> -%</!options&!driver> - % End module: cjs-rcs-french.mbs -% \end{macrocode} -% \Finale diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs deleted file mode 100644 index 10c84b1ff69..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8009 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse meta-comment -*- mode: doctex -*- -% -% Master bibliography style for The Canadian Journal of Statistics | -% La revue canadienne de statistique -% -% Copyright (C) 2023 Statistical Society of Canada | Société -% canadienne de statistique -% -% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions -% of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this -% license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version -% of this license is in: -% -% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. -% -% The Current Maintainer of this work is Vincent Goulet -% <vincent.goulet@act.ulaval.ca>. -% -% This work derives from merlin.mbs, part of the custom-bib -% collection, a contribution to the LaTeX2e system. -% Copyright 1994-2011 Patrick W Daly -% Max-Planck-Institut f\"ur Sonnensystemforschung -% Max-Planck-Str. 2 -% D-37191 Katlenburg-Lindau -% Germany -% E-mail: daly@mps.mpg.de -% -%<*!tail> -% (The following notice appears in bst files generated from this file) - % ------------------------------------------------------------------- - % Name and version information of the main mbs file: -%\fi - % \ProvidesFile{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}[2023/11/29 v1.0 (VG, PWD, AO, DPC)] -%\iffalse -%</!tail> -%<*a&!a> -% The following ensures that the driver part is not seen by makebst -% The driver part must not contain any \end other than \end{document} ! -\ifx\endoptions\undefined\let\tempx=\relax\else - \long\def\tempx#1\end#2{}\fi\tempx -%</a&!a> -%<*driver> -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% -\documentclass[nocjs,x11names,french,english]{cjs-rcs-article} - \usepackage{metalogo} - \setlrmarginsandblock{40mm}{30mm}{*} % increase left margin - \checkandfixthelayout - - %% Loading doc.sty creates some conflicts with the class and memoir. We - %% need to: - %% - %% - keep a copy of the class' \maketitle command; - %% - undefine the 'glossary' environment created by memoir; - %% - restore the standard LaTeX commands for the glossary that - %% doc.sty relies upon. - \let\makeCJStitle\maketitle % keep class definition - \let\theglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty - \let\endtheglossary\relax % avoid conflict with doc.sty - \makeatletter - \def\makeglossary{% - \newwrite\@glossaryfile - \immediate\openout\@glossaryfile=\jobname.glo - \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup - \@sanitize - \@wrglossary}\typeout - {Writing glossary file \jobname.glo }% - \let\makeglossary\@empty - } - \@onlypreamble\makeglossary - \def\@wrglossary#1{% - \protected@write\@glossaryfile{}% - {\string\glossaryentry{#1}{\thepage}}% - \endgroup - \@esphack} - \def\glossary{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index} - \@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse % turn off twoside option - \makeatother - \usepackage{doc} - \def\changes#1#2#3{\glossary{#1>#3}} % simplified - \DisableCrossrefs - \CodelineNumbered - \RecordChanges - \OnlyDescription - \DontCheckModules - - \AtEndPreamble{% - \hypersetup{% - pdfauthor = {Statistical Society of Canada}, - pdftitle = {Master bibliographic style cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}}} - - %% Configuration of the glossary - \addto\extrasenglish{% - \def\glossaryname{Version history}} - \GlossaryPrologue{\section*{\glossaryname}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\glossaryname}} - \setlength{\GlossaryMin}{5cm} - - %% Additional semantic typesetting - \newcommand*\class[1]{\textsf{#1}} - \newcommand*\btx{\textsc{Bib}\TeX} - \newcommand*\dtx{\textsf{docstrip}} - - %% Name of the journal - \makeatletter - \newcommand*\TheCJS{\@ifstar{\emph{The Journal}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@en}}} - \newcommand*\LaRevue{\@ifstar{\emph{La revue}}{\emph{\CJS@journalname@fr}}} - \newcommand*\CJSclass{\class{cjs-rcs-article}} - \newcommand*\CJSbsten{\texttt{cjs-rcs-en.bst}} - \newcommand*\CJSbstfr{\texttt{cjs-rcs-fr.bst}} - \makeatother - - %% Redefine \year using information from \filedate instead of using - %% compilation time - \def\parsedate#1/#2/#3\relax{\def\year{#1}} - - \MakeShortVerb{\|} - -\begin{document} - \DocInput{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% end of meta-comment \fi -% \GetFileInfo{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs} -% \expandafter\parsedate\filedate\relax -% -% \changes{0.9}{2023-10-14}{Initial version based on version 4.33 of -% \texttt{merlin.mbs}.} -% \changes{0.92}{2023-10-27}{Relegate the \texttt{makebst} menu -% information to the complete documentation.} -% \changes{0.93}{2023-11-06}{Add a prefix v in the version number like -% the main file.} -% \changes{1.0}{2023-11-29}{First official release distributed through -% CTAN.} -% -% \title[Master bibliographic style file \filename]{% -% Master bibliographic style file \\ -% of \TheCJS} -% \author{Statistical Society of Canada} -% \affil{Developed by Vincent Goulet, Université Laval} -% -% \begin{englishabstract} -% The list of references in {\TheCJS} is typeset using the -% bibliographic styles {\CJSbsten} for articles in English and -% {\CJSbstfr} for articles in French. These styles are created using -% the program \texttt{makebst} from the master bibliographic file -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs}, and the language definition files -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} and \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}. -% \end{englishabstract} -% \begin{frenchabstract} -% La liste des références dans {\LaRevue} est composée avec les -% style de bibliographie {\CJSbstfr} pour les articles en français -% et {\CJSbsten} pour les articles en anglais. Ceux-ci sont générés -% par le programme \texttt{makebst} à partir du fichier maitre -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-merlin.mbs} et des fichiers de localisation -% \texttt{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} et \texttt{cjs-rcs-french.mbs}. -% \end{frenchabstract} -% -% ^^A abusing the 'classification' environment. The final period is -% ^^A added by the environment. -% \begin{classification}[Version] -% \item[] This is the documentation for the file \code{\filename} -% {\fileversion}, dated {\filedate} -% \end{classification} -% -% \licence{{\year}, Statistical Society of Canada~{\textbar}~Société -% canadienne de statistique} -% -% \makeCJStitle -% -% \section{Introduction} -% -% The class {\CJSclass} typesets manuscripts immediately in accordance -% with the presentation rules of {\TheCJS}. The class uses its own -% bibliographic styles: {\CJSbsten} for articles in English, and -% {\CJSbstfr} for articles in French. The style {\CJSbsten} could best -% be described as ``not unlike \code{apalike}'', whereas {\CJSbstfr} -% is closely derived from the style \code{francais} provided by the -% package % -% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/francais-bst}{\pkg{francais-bst}}. -% -% The styles were originally generated using the program -% \code{makebst} by Patrick W.~Daly. The master bibliographic style -% and the language definition files are heavily based on their -% counterparts of the package % -% \href{https://ctan.org/pkg/custom-bib}{\pkg{custom-bib}}, % -% namely \code{merlin.mbs}, \code{english.mbs}, and \code{french.mbs}. -% -% \section{Generation of the bibliographic styles} -% \label{sec:generation} -% -% The English style {\CJSbsten} is produced from this master -% bibliographic style file and the language definition file -% \code{cjs-rcs-english.mbs} by running the driver -% \code{cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj} through {\LaTeX}: -% \begin{quote} -% \code{latex cjs-rcs-bst-en.dbj} -% \end{quote} -% The French style {\CJSbstfr} is produced similarly using the driver -% \code{cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj}: -% \begin{quote} -% \code{latex cjs-rcs-bst-fr.dbj} -% \end{quote} -% -% \section{Changes compared to \texorpdfstring{\code{merlin.mbs}}{merlin.mbs}} -% \label{sec:changes} -% -% The master bibliographic style \code{\filename} introduces the following -% changes compared to \code{merlin.mbs}. -% -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item The function \code{format.url} is reworked to provide a -% cleaner URL for digital object identifiers (DOIs). The -% \code{merlin.mbs} definition would generate a DOI of the form -% \begin{quote} -% URL \texttt{http://dx.doi.org/\meta{doi}} -% \end{quote} -% The revised definition instead generates the simpler string -% \begin{quote} -% doi: \meta{doi} -% \end{quote} -% When the package \pkg{hyperref} is loaded, \meta{doi} is a -% hyperlink to the now recommended URL -% \code{https://doi.org/\meta{doi}}. This behaviour relies on a -% command \cmd{\urldoi} provided in the \texttt{.bbl} file. If -% needed, this command may be redefined by the user. -% \item The command \cmd{\urlprefix} is empty. Again, this may be -% redefined by the user. -% \item The quotes «~» are typeset by the macro \cmd{\frquote} of -% \pkg{babel-french} (version $\geq$ 3.1), rather than by the custom -% commands \cmd{\guillemotleft} and \cmd{\guillemotright}. -% \item The \code{makebst} menu information is only included in the -% complete documentation. The latter is obtained by commenting out -% the command \cmd{\OnlyDescription} in \code{\filename} and -% compiling the file with {pdf\LaTeX} or {\XeLaTeX}. -% \end{enumerate} -% -% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges} -% -% \begin{quote} -% \itshape From this point on, the documentation is taken without -% modification from \code{merlin.mbs} by Patrick W.~Daly, but for -% minute details such as filenames. -% \end{quote} -% -% \section{The Menu Information}\label{sec:menu} -% -% Here I describe the options and menu information for this particular -% master file \texttt{\filename}. To construct a \dtx{} driver file -% to generate a desired \texttt{.bst} file, simply process \texttt{makebst.tex} -% with \TeX\ or \LaTeX, and give -% \begin{quote}\code{\filename}\end{quote} -% when prompted for the name of the master file. Then answer the questions -% in the menus that follow. The menu information is extracted from here. -% -% All the menu information is nested between \dtx{} guard options -% |%<*options>| \dots\ |%</options>|, and the last command is -% |\endoptions|. The rest of the file is nested between -% \begin{quote} -% |%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst>| \dots\ |</!options&!driver&!bblbst>| -% \end{quote} -% in order to exclude it if \dtx{} is used to -% extract the menu information, the documentation driver, or the -% \texttt{babelbst.tex} file. -% -% The main coding is divided into two sections, the \emph{head} and -% \emph{tail}; in between come any external language or journal name -% support files. The head part is marked with the \dtx{} guard option -% |<!tail>| and the tail with |<!head>|. This roundabout means of -% doing things makes it possible to process \texttt{\filename} with -% \texttt{.dbj} files that were generated for the older -% \texttt{genbst.mbs} file by simply changing the name of the source -% file. If both \texttt{head} and \texttt{tail} (and \texttt{exlang}) -% options are omitted, as they are in the older \texttt{.dbj} files, -% \texttt{\filename} is processed completely in one pass. To include -% external files, two passes are needed, one for each part, with the -% external file(s) coming in between. -% -% Note too that if the internal language commands are taken (i.e., if -% \texttt{exlang} option is not given) then the default language is -% English, which is tested for as |<!babel>|. This too permits the simple -% update of older \texttt{.dbj}, at least for English. -% -% \subsection*{Selecting Language} -% Explicit words in the bibliography style, such as \textsl{and}, -% \textsl{editor}, etc., -% are represented by functions \texttt{bbl.and}, \texttt{bbl.editor}, and so on. -% By default these functions translate to the normal English text, but -% other languages are also possible. -% -% The definitions of these functions for other languages are contained in -% external files. At this point, we can make use of features in -% \texttt{makebst} (version~3.0 or later) to ask for the name of such a -% definition file, and store it in |\cfile|. If no external file is -% specified, then the internal definitions are taken, for which there are -% two possibilities: English or \LaTeX{} commands (Babel). -% -% The commands |\MBswitch|, |\mes|, |\MBaskfile|, |\wr|, |\pc|, |\spsp| are -% defined in \texttt{makebst.tex}. -% -% If |\MBswitch| does not exist, then the version of \texttt{makebst} -% cannot support external files. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*options> -\expandafter\ifx\csname beginoptiongroup\endcsname\relax - \mes{^^J******************^^J% - !!!!!! VERSION CLASH !!!!!!!!!^^J% - This mbs file requires makebst version 4.0 or more^^J% - You must update makebst to run it with this mbs file^^J% - No docstrip batch file can be produced on this run^^J% - ******************} - \let\temp\endinput\else\let\temp\relax\fi\temp - -\newif\ifnumerical -\newif\ifmytemp -\mes{<<< For more information about the meanings of^^J% - <<< the various options, see the section on ^^J% - <<< Menu Information in the .mbs file documentation.} - -\umes{EXTERNAL FILES:} -\expandafter\ifx\csname MBswitch\endcsname\relax - \mes{^^J**************^^J% - Makebst version is less than 3.0^^J% - Cannot add external file for language definition^^J% - **************} - \umes{No included files.}% - \def\cfile{}\def\jfile{}% -\else - \MBaskfile{^^JName of language definition file}(\mroot.\mext)i\cfile - \edef\ctemp{\mroot.\mext} - \ifx\ctemp\cfile\def\cfile{}\fi - \umes{Name of language file: \string\cfile=\cfile.}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% A second type of external file that can be added is one containing names -% of journals that are to be prestored into the \texttt{.bst} file. -% Several file names are allowed here, with the root names separated by -% commas, and with the common extension added at the end. To assist later -% parsing of the names, an additional comma is added before the extension. -% -% Note that in this case |\MBaskfile| treats the file(s) as output, i.e., -% it does not check if the file(s) actually exist. -% -% The macro |\Mgetnext| allows the root names to be extracted from the -% list of file names. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\jfile{} - \ask{\yn}{^^JInclude file(s) for extra journal names? (NO)} - \mytempfalse - \if!\yn!\else\if\yn n\else\if\yn N\else\mytemptrue\fi\fi\fi - \ifmytemp - \MBaskfile{^^JFile to include}(physjour,geojour,photjour.mbs)o\jfile - \edef\jfile{\froot,.\fext} - \umes{Name of included files: \string\jfile=\jfile.}% - \else - \umes{No included files.}% - \fi -\fi%MBswitch -\def\Mgetnext#1,#2.#3??{\def\froot{#1}\def\Mrest{#2}\def\fext{#3}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If no external files are specified, then both |\cfile| and |\jfile| are -% empty. In this case, do \emph{not} set the options \texttt{head} and -% \texttt{tail}, which control the \dtx{} passes through -% \texttt{filename}. Now only one pass is made. -% -% If there is an external definition file, or an external list of -% journal names, then some extra text must be -% written to fit in with that already written by \texttt{makebst}. This is -% explained in that documentation. The |\MBswitch| command turns the curly -% braces |{..}| into normal characters, and the parentheses |(..)| take on -% their grouping functionality. This permits unbalanced braces to be -% written to the output file. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\if!\cfile\jfile!\else - \begingroup\MBswitch - \wr(\spsp head,\string\MBopta}) - \if!\cfile!\else - \wr(\string\from{\cfile}{\string\MBopta}) - \fi - \if!\jfile!\else - \let\jxfile\jfile - \loop -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Parse the list of journal name files, adding a new |\from| for each one. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \expandafter\Mgetnext\jxfile?? - \wr(\string\from{\froot.\fext}{\string\MBopta}) - \edef\jxfile(\Mrest.\fext) - \if!\Mrest!\def\Mtst(1)\else\def\Mtst()\fi - \if!\Mtst! - \repeat - \fi - \wr(\string\from{\mroot.\mext}{tail,\string\MBopta}}) - \wr(\string\def\string\MBopta{\pc) - \endgroup -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Ask whether there is a need for -% explicit English words or \LaTeX{} commands whose definitions are -% to be found in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{INTERNAL LANGUAGE SUPPORT - (if no external language file)}% - {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{English}{words used explicitly} -\optdef{b}{babel}{Babel} - {(words replaced by commands defined in babelbst.tex)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\if!\cfile!\relax\else -\wr{\spsp\spsp exlang,\pc: External language file} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Author--year or numerical} -% The first question is whether a numerical or author--year citation -% style is to be used. If the latter, the supporting system is my -% \code{natbib.sty}, which expects |\bibitem| to have an optional -% argument containing the short form of the authors, plus year in -% parentheses. E.g., -% \begin{quote} -% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)]{key}...| -% \end{quote} -% There is now a newer version of \texttt{natbib.sty} (v5.3) that -% supports an optional full author list too, as -% \begin{quote} -% |\bibitem[Daly et al.(1990)Daly, Keppler, and Williams]{key}...| -% \end{quote} -% Other systems are also supported, such as the Harvard family of -% bibliography styles (with \texttt{harvard.sty}), which have entries in the -% form -% \begin{quote} -% |\harvarditem[Daly et al.]{Daly, Keppler,|\\ -% | and Williams}{1990}{key}...| -% \end{quote} -% or the astronomy family (with \texttt{astron.sty}) with entries like -% \begin{quote} -% |\bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...| -% \end{quote} -% or the Chicago family (with \texttt{chicago.sty}) with entries like -% \begin{quote} -% |\bibitem[\protect\citeautheryear{Daly, Keppler, and|\\ -% | Williams}{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...| -% \end{quote} -% or the `named' variant of Chicago (with \texttt{named.sty}) with entries like -% \begin{quote} -% |\bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Daly et al.}{1990}]{key}...| -% \end{quote} -% or the so-called ``author--date'' group (with \texttt{authordate1-4.sty}) -% with entries of the form -% \begin{quote} -% |\bibitem[\protect\citename{Daly et al.}1990]{key}...| -% \end{quote} -% Finally, there is the \texttt{apalike} format of Oren Patashnik, for use -% with \texttt{apalike.sty} that has entries of the form -% \begin{quote} -% |\bibitem[Daly et al., 1990]{key}...| -% \end{quote} -% -% In addition to numerical or author--year citation styles, there is also a -% \texttt{cite} style available in which the label is the same as the cite -% key. This is for listing entire contents of databases with the cite key -% visible. -% -% A flag |\ifnumerical| is established because some of the following menu -% features depend on which system is to be used. -% -% The \texttt{alph} option produces labels as in \texttt{alpha.bst}; options -% \texttt{alf-1} and \texttt{alf-f} modify these. Standard is: first three -% letters of the single author (Dal90 for Daly, 1990) and first letters of -% first three authors (DK90 for Daly and Kopka, 1990). Alternatives are first -% three letters of the first author, no matter how many authors there are, and -% full name of first author. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{STYLE OF CITATIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Numerical}{as in standard LaTeX} -\optdef{a}{ay}{Author-year}{with some non-standard interface} -\optdef{b}{alph}{Alpha style, Jon90 or JWB90}{for single or multiple authors} -\optdef{o}{alph,alf-1}{Alpha style, Jon90}{even for multiple authors} -\optdef{f}{alph,alf-f}{Alpha style, Jones90}{(full name of first author)} -\optdef{c}{cite}{Cite key}{(special for listing contents of bib file)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\if\ans a\numericalfalse\else\numericaltrue\fi -\if\ans b\mytempfalse \else\mytemptrue \fi -\beginoptiongroup{HTML OUTPUT - (if non author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical*\fi} -\optdef{*}{}{Normal LaTeX}{output} -\optdef{h}{html}{Hypertext}{output, in HTML code, in paragraphs} -\optdef{n}{html,htlist}{Hypertext list}{with sequence numbers} -\optdef{k}{html,htdes}{Hypertext with keys}{for viewing databases} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR--YEAR SUPPORT SYSTEM - (if author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical\else*\fi} -\optdef{*}{nat}{Natbib}{for use with natbib v5.3 or later} -\optdef{o}{}{Older Natbib}{without full authors citations} -\optdef{l}{alk}{Apalike}{for use with apalike.sty} -\optdef{h}{har}{Harvard}{system with harvard.sty} -\optdef{a}{ast}{Astronomy}{system with astron.sty} -\optdef{c}{cay}{Chicago}{system with chicago.sty} -\optdef{n}{nmd}{Named}{system with named.sty} -\optdef{d}{cn}{Author-date}{system with authordate1-4.sty} -\getans -% \end{macrocode} -% The \texttt{harvard} family has been extended for \LaTeXe, and the new -% \texttt{.bst} files allow the word \textsl{and} and the brackets around years -% to be variable with commands. These features may be added too. -% The URL field used to be exclusively part of Harvard, but now exists -% independently of it too. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{HARVARD EXTENSIONS INCLUDED - (if Harvard support selected)} - {\if\ans h*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{harnm}{With Harvard extensions}{for LaTeX2e version of harvard.sty} -\optdef{n}{}{Older Harvard}{style, for LaTeX 2.09} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Language switching} -% A \texttt{language} field can be present to specify the original language of -% the reference; with \verb!\setlanguage!, the hyphenation patterns are set for -% setting the title in that language. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{LANGUAGE FIELD}{} -\optdef{*}{}{No language field}{} -\optdef{l}{lang}{Add language field}{to switch hyphenation patterns temporarily} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Annotations} -% Annotations to a reference are additional information not normally printed -% out in the list of references. They are used for listing databases. -% The coding here was offered by Soren Dayton. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{ANNOTATIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{No annotations}{will be recognized} -\optdef{a}{annote}{Annotations}{in annote field or in .tex file of citekey name} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Presentations} -% Presentations are talks at meetings, oral or poster, that are not otherwise -% published. The author making the presentation is indicated with the \texttt{key} -% entry, which is the speaker's number within the author list. The font used -% to highlight the speaker is either bold or italics, depending on the secondary -% option, otherwise not highlighted. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{PRESENTATIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Do not add presentation type}{for conference talks} -\optdef{p}{pres}{Add presentation, speaker not highlighted}{} -\optdef{b}{pres,pres-bf}{Presentation, speaker bold face}{} -\optdef{i}{pres,pres-it}{Presentaion, speaker italic}{} -\optdef{c}{pres,pres-sc}{Presentaion, speaker in small caps}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Ordering of the listed references} -% Choices here depend on citation style. The default in both cases is -% alphabetical order of all authors. For numerical style, one may also -% choose an unsorted order, which means the order is the same as the original -% citations. This corresponds to \texttt{unsrt.bst}. Order of citation is -% also offered for author--year for \texttt{natbib}-type styles that can -% also be used for numerical listings. -% -% Another possibility is to order first by year, then authors. This too only -% makes sense for numerical citations. However, it is offered for author--year -% in the event that a \texttt{natbib}-type style is used for numerical -% listings. -% -% For the alpha style, the ordering is by label only, so no option is -% offered here (|\ifnumerical| is \meta{true} and |\ifmytemp| is \meta{false}). -% -% For author--year, the second choice is by label. (The label is the -% optional |\bibitem| argument, and is what is printed in place of the -% |\cite| command.) With this option, all the papers with the same first -% author are ordered so that the one-author papers come first, followed by -% the two-author papers, followed by the multiple-author papers. This is a -% more sensible system for author--year citations, and is demanded by some -% journals (like JGR). -% -% One problem that can arise here is when two or more references have the -% same set of authors and year; normally they are then ordered by the -% title, ignoring initial words like \textsl{the} and \textsl{a}, with the -% letters a, b, -% c, \dots, added to the year. This can mean that a set of references with -% a natural sequence will be put into a different order. An alternative is -% to order them by the citation keyword instead of by title. This of course -% assumes that the keywords in this case reflect that natural sequence. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\ans\relax -\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES - (if non-author/year and non-alph)} - {\ifnumerical\ifmytemp*\fi\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors} -\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, like unsrt.bst)} -\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors} -\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% -\beginoptiongroup{ORDERING OF REFERENCES - (if author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Alphabetical}{by all authors} -\optdef{l}{seq-lab}{By label}% - {(Jones before Jones and James before Jones et al)} -\optdef{m}{seq-labc}{By label and cite order}% - {(like above but all Jones et al ordered as cited)} -\optdef{k}{seq-key}{By label and cite key}{instead of label and title, as above} -\optdef{d}{seq-yr}{Year ordered}{and then by authors (for publication lists)} -\optdef{r}{seq-yrr}{Reverse year ordered}{and then by authors (most recent first)} -\optdef{c}{seq-no}{Citation order}{(unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% The standard \btx\ styles consider the \emph{von} part of the name to be a -% fixed part of the surname. European usage tends to alphabetize ignoring these -% honorifics. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{ORDER ON VON PART - (if not citation order)} - {\if\ans c\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Sort on von part}{(de la Maire before Defoe)} -\optdef{x}{vonx}{Sort without von part}{(de la Maire after Mahone)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Sorting normally treats authors with the same surname but different initials -% or first name separately; but a strict ordering by cite label would lump all -% Smiths together. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{IGNORE FIRST NAMES (if author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Respect first names}{or initials, treat as different authors} -\optdef{x}{xintls}{Sort on surname only}{and treat all Smiths as one} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Formatting author names} -% The default is that the full names of the authors are listed, given names -% first, unabbreviated. Of course, if only the initials have been given in -% the \texttt{.bib} file, then that is all that can appear in the list. Other -% possibilities are to use initials (even if full names in the \texttt{.bib} -% file) either before or after the surnames. A specialty of the journals of -% the American Geophysical Union is to have only the first name with -% reversed initials. -% -% If the reference is part of a larger work with editors, then the editor -% names appear later in the reference text, usually as ``edited by \dots'' -% or as ``\emph{names} (editors)''. In these cases, the editor names are -% not usually reversed (surname first) even if the authors' names are. -% An option is provided to format such editor names exactly as the authors'. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{AUTHOR NAMES:}{} -\optdef{*}{ed-au}{Full, surname last}{(John Frederick Smith)} -\optdef{f}{nm-revf}{Full, surname first}{(Smith, John Frederick)} -\optdef{i}{nm-init,ed-au}{Initials + surname}{(J. F. Smith)} -\optdef{r}{nm-rev}{Surname + initials}{(Smith, J. F.)} -\optdef{s}{nm-rv}{Surname + dotless initials}{(Smith J F)} -\optdef{w}{nm-rvvc}{Surname + comma + spaceless initials}{(Smith, J.F.)} -\optdef{x}{nm-rvx}{Surname + pure initials}{(Smith JF)} -\optdef{y}{nm-rvcx}{Surname + comma + pure initials}{(Smith, JF)} -\optdef{z}{nm-rvv}{Surname + spaceless initials}{(Smith J.F.)} -\optdef{a}{nm-rev1}{Only first name reversed, initials}% - {(AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)} -\optdef{b}{nm-revv1}{First name reversed, with full names}% - {(Smith, John Fred, Harry Kab Jones)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\mytempfalse -\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans r\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi -\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN COLLECTIONS - (if author names reversed)} - {\ifmytemp*\fi} -\if\ans r -\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith} -\fi -\if\ans s -\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J J Smith} -\fi -\if\ans a -\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J. J. Smith} -\fi -\if\ans x -\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by JJ Smith} -\fi -\if\ans f -\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith} -\fi -\if\ans y -\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by J.J. Smith} -\fi -\if\ans b -\optdef{*}{}{Editor names NOT reversed}{as edited by John James Smith} -\fi -\optdef{r}{ed-rev}{Editor names reversed}{just like authors'} -\getans -\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF JUNIOR - (if author names reversed)} - {} -\optdef{*}{jnrlst}{Junior comes last}{as Smith, John, Jr.} -\optdef{m}{}{Junior between}{as Smith, Jr., John} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{JUNIOR PART IN THE CITATION - (if author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{No `junior' part in the citations}{but in the ref listing} -\optdef{j}{jnrlab}{`Junior' in citations}{as well as in ref listing} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN AUTHOR NAMES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Author names separated by commas}{} -\optdef{s}{aunm-semi}{Names separated by semi-colon}{} -\optdef{h}{aunm-sl}{Names separated by slash}{/} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{ADJACENT REFERENCES WITH REPEATED NAMES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Author/editor names always present}{} -\optdef{d}{nmdash}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by dash}{} -\optdef{2}{nmdash,nmd-2}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 2 dashes}{} -\optdef{3}{nmdash,nmd-3}{Repeated author/editor names replaced by 3 dashes}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Number of authors} -% Normally the complete list of authors as given in the \texttt{.bib} file is -% presented in the reference list. However, some journals prefer to limit -% them to a maximum. If there are more than this maximum number of author -% names, then a minimum number plus \textsl{et al.} are listed. -% -% Because no test for consistency of the numbers is carried out in the -% \texttt{.bst} file itself (it might be possible, but I found it too complex), -% this is done here. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER OF AUTHORS IN BIBLIOGRAPHY:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{All authors}{included in listing} -\optdef{l}{nmlm}{Limited authors}{(et al replaces missing names)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\if\ans l -\loop - \ask{\num}{Maximum number of authors (1-99)} - \ifnum\num>99\relax - \mes{*** Must be between 1 and 99} -\repeat -\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp x#1,\pc: Maximum of #1\space authors} - \else\wr{\spsp\spsp x#10,x#2,\pc: Maximum of #1#2\space authors}\fi} -\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax -\mes{\spsp You have selected maximum \num\space authors} -\edef\numx{\num} -\loop - \ask{\num}{Minimum number (before et al given) (1-\numx)} - \ifnum\num>\numx - \mes{*** Must be between 1 and \numx} -\repeat -\def\parsenum#1#2{\if#2\relax\wr{\spsp\spsp m#1,\pc: Minimum of #1\space authors} - \else\wr{\spsp\spsp m#10,m#2,\pc: Minimum of #1#2\space authors}\fi} -\expandafter\parsenum\num\relax -\mes{\spsp You have selected minimum \num\space authors} -\fi - -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Something that I finally added after being asked many times, is to allow for -% more than one name in the citation before inserting \textsl{et~al.} -% to allow more than 2 authors before truncating -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{AUTHORS IN CITATIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{One author et al}{for three or more authors} -\optdef{m}{mcite}{Some other truncation scheme}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\mytempfalse -\if\ans m\mytemptrue\fi -\beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS BEFORE ET AL: - (if regular cite not selected)} - {\ifmytemp*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{mct-1}{One et al}{} -\optdef{2}{mct-2}{One, Two et al}{} -\optdef{3}{mct-3}{One, Two, Three et al}{} -\optdef{4}{mct-4}{One, Two, Three, Four et al}{} -\optdef{5}{mct-5}{One, Two, Three, Four, Five et al}{} -\optdef{6}{mct-6}{One, Two, Three, Four, Five, Six et al}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{MAX AUTHORS WITHOUT ET AL: - (if regular cite not selected)} - {\ifmytemp*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{mct-x2}{Two authors without truncating}{} -\optdef{3}{mct-x3}{Three authors}{without truncating} -\optdef{4}{mct-x4}{Four authors}{without truncating} -\optdef{5}{mct-x5}{Five authors}{without truncating} -\optdef{6}{mct-x6}{Six authors}{without truncating} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Typeface of names} -% The author names in the list of references normally appear in the current -% typeface. This may be changed to small caps, bold, or italics. -% -% Alternatively, the surnames only can be formatted, with the first names in the -% regular font. One can also specify that the words `and' and `et~al.'\ should be -% in the regular font, or that `et~al.'\ be italic. -% -% Another possibility is that the names be put into a command |\bibnamefont{..}|, -% which must be defined in the \LaTeX\ document. By default, this command does -% not format its argument. There is also a |\bibfnamefont| command for the first -% names, to be user-defined. -% -% Editor names in a collection or in a book will not normally have these -% fonts applied to them; this may be additionally selected. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Normal font for author names}{} -\optdef{s}{nmft,nmft-sc}{Small caps authors}{(\string\sc)} -\optdef{i}{nmft,nmft-it}{Italic authors}{(\string\it\space or \string\em)} -\optdef{b}{nmft,nmft-bf}{Bold authors}{(\string\bf)} -\optdef{u}{nmft,nmft-def}{User defined author font}{(\string\bibnamefont)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\mytempfalse -\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi -\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES - (if non-default font for authors)} - {\ifmytemp*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{First names same font as surnames}{} -\optdef{r}{fnm-rm}{First names in normal font}{} -\optdef{u}{fnm-def}{First names in user defined font}{(\string\bibfnamefont)} -\getans -\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Editors incollection normal font}{} -\optdef{a}{nmfted}{Editors incollection like authors}{font} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{`And' in author font}{(JONES AND JAMES)} -\optdef{r}{nmand-rm}{`And' in normal font}{(JONES and JAMES)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Names in Citation label} -% This applies to author--year style only. The label is the text written -% by the |\cite| command, and for author--year style, this is something like -% `Daly et al.\ (1990b)'. One may select italics for the authors and for the -% extra label attached to the year. The year always remains plain. -% -% This parallels the font selection for the names in the list of references -% except that there no choice for the first names, since only surnames -% are used in the labels. A user-defined |\citefontname| may also -% be selected, but this \emph{must} be defined by the user since there -% will be no default definition for it. -% -% If a font is selected for the cited authors, then the word `and' may be -% optionally put in the normal font. -% -% It is not possible to select the type of brackets for the year, since -% this is determined by the \LaTeX{} style option that manages the -% author--year citations. This is not standard \LaTeX, so that there are a -% number of private style files for achieving this. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT - (if author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Cited authors plain}{as result of \string\cite\space command} -\optdef{i}{lab,lab-it}{Cited authors italic}{} -\optdef{s}{lab,lab-sc}{Cited authors small caps}{} -\optdef{b}{lab,lab-bf}{Cited authors bold}{} -\optdef{u}{lab,lab-def}{User defined citation font}{(\string\citenamefont)} -\getans - -\mytempfalse -\if\ans i\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans u\mytemptrue\fi -\beginoptiongroup{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS - (if non-default font for citation lables)} - {\ifmytemp*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Cited `and' in author font}{} -\optdef{r}{and-rm}{Cited `and' in normal font}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF EXTRA LABEL - (The extra letter on the year)}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Extra label plain}{} -\optdef{i}{xlab-it}{Extra label italic}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Label for missing author names} -% -% If the author and/or editor is missing, the standard \texttt{.bst} files -% use the \texttt{key} field in place of the names for purposes of ordering the -% entries. -% -% For author--year styles, the \texttt{key} field is even inserted in the -% reference list and in the label in place of the authors. Optionally, one can -% suppress the year in this case, which causes \texttt{natbib} (version~7) -% to print only that key text as a code designation for the work. Thus if -% \texttt{KEY = "CS1-345"} and there are no authors, then |\citep| produces -% (CS1-345) and |\citet| simply CS1-345. That is, they behave like -% |\citeauthor|. If \texttt{natbib} did not recognize the blank year, one would -% get (CS1-345, ) and CS1-345 (). (Earlier versions of \texttt{natbib} crash on -% a blank year.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING - (if author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{keyxyr}{Year blank when KEY replaces missing author}{(for natbib 7.0)} -\optdef{y}{}{Year included when KEY replaces missing author}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Missing date} -% A missing date can be set to ???? or simply left blank. In the latter case, -% \texttt{natbib} version~7 will print only the authors without any year -% punctuation or brackets. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{MISSING DATE - (if author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Missing date set to ????}{in label and text} -\optdef{b}{blkyear}{Missing date left blank}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Position of date} -% This applies to author--year style only. It makes sense to put the date -% immediately after the author list, since the two items (author and year) -% are the identifiers of the reference. Default position is at the -% end of the references, before any notes. It is also possible to place -% it even after the notes. -% -% Medical journals have a system where the date is part of the journal -% specification, as Lancet 1994;45(2):34--40. Otherwise the date appears at -% the end. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{DATE POSITION:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Date at end}{} -\optdef{b}{dt-beg}{Date after authors}{} -\optdef{j}{dt-jnl}{Date part of journal spec.}{(as 1994;45:34-40) else at end} -\optdef{e}{dt-end}{Date at very end}{after any notes} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\if\ans b\mytemptrue\else\if\ans j\mytemptrue\else\mytempfalse\fi\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Format of date} -% The year may be enclosed in parentheses, brackets, or preceded by a -% colon. If none of these are selected, the date (month plus year) appears. -% For author--year, the date normally consists only of the year, no month, -% but this may be overridden. -% -% If the date comes just after the authors, then one might want special -% punctuation following it, like a colon, or space only. The latter is -% probably desirable if the date is brackets or parentheses. -% -% The date can even be put into bold face. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT - (if non author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Plain month and year}{without any brackets} -\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Date in parentheses}{as (May 1993)} -\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Date in brackets}{as [May 1993]} -\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Date preceded by colon}{as `: May 1993'} -\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Date preceded by period}{as `. May 1993'} -\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, May 1993'} -\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Date preceded by space}{only, as ` May 1993'} -\getans -\beginoptiongroup{SUPPRESS MONTH:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Date is month and year}{} -\optdef{x}{xmth}{Date is year only}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE - (if including month)} - {\if\ans x\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{} -\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{DATE FORMAT - (if author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Year plain}{without any brackets} -\optdef{p}{yr-par}{Year in parentheses}{as (1993)} -\optdef{b}{yr-brk}{Year in brackets}{as [1993]} -\optdef{c}{yr-col}{Year preceded by colon}{as `: 1993'} -\optdef{d}{yr-per}{Year preceded by period}{as `. 1993'} -\optdef{m}{yr-com}{Date preceded by comma}{as `, 1993'} -\optdef{s}{yr-blk}{Year preceded by space}{only, as ` 1993'} -\getans -\beginoptiongroup{INCLUDE MONTHS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Date is year only}{without the month} -\optdef{m}{aymth}{Include month in date}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{REVERSED DATE - (if including month)} - {\if\ans m*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Date as month year}{} -\optdef{r}{dtrev}{Date as year month}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{DATE PUNCTUATION - (if date not at end)} - {\ifmytemp*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Date with standard block punctuation}{(comma or period)} -\optdef{c}{yrp-col}{Colon after date}{as 1994:} -\optdef{s}{yrp-semi}{Semi-colon after date}{as 1994;} -\optdef{p}{yrp-per}{Period after date}{even when blocks use commas} -\optdef{x}{yrp-x}{No punct. after date}{} -\getans -\beginoptiongroup{BLANK AFTER DATE:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Space after date}{and punctuation} -\optdef{x}{yrpp-xsp}{No space after date}{as 1994:45} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{DATE FONT:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Date in normal font}{} -\optdef{b}{dtbf}{Date in bold face}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Normally in author--year citations, the \texttt{year} entry is truncated -% to the last 4 characters, which should be the 4 digits of the year. Some -% users have requested the possibility of suppressing this truncation so -% that they may put text in the \texttt{year} field, such as ``in press.'' -% Another use for it is when years are given as ``1968--72''. Actually, -% I have no idea why the year should be truncated at all. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{TRUNCATE YEAR - (if author-year citations)} - {\ifnumerical\else*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{note-yr}{Year text full}{as 1990--1993 or `in press'} -\optdef{t}{}{Year truncated}{to last 4 digits} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Article title in journal} -% The title of an article in a journal or in a collection (a book, or -% conference proceedings) may appear plain, in italics, within single -% or double quotes or even in guillemets. The last is best with T1 coding; a -% poor man's version for OT1 is provided; \LaTeXe\ is required in both cases. -% -% Furthermore, it may have sentence capitalization (first -% word and word following colon) or be capitalized as in the \texttt{.bib} file -% entry. That is why it is recommended to capitalize the entry text as it -% should appear when fully capitalized, putting words that are always -% capitalized in braces. Example: -% \begin{quote} -% |TITLE="The Results of the {Giotto} Mission"| -% \end{quote} -% which produces either ``The results of the Giotto mission'' or ``The -% Results of the Giotto Mission'', depending on option. -% -% Additionally, the article titles may be fully suppressed. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{TITLE OF ARTICLE:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Title plain}{with no special font} -\optdef{i}{tit-it}{Title italic}{(\string\em)} -\optdef{q}{tit-qq,qt-s}{Title and punctuation in single quotes}{(`Title,' ..)} -\optdef{d}{tit-qq}{Title and punctuation in double quotes}{(``Title,'' ..)} -\optdef{g}{tit-qq,qt-g}{Title and punctuation in guillemets}{(<<Title,>> ..)} -\optdef{x}{tit-qq,qt-s,qx}{Title in single quotes}{(`Title', ..)} -\optdef{y}{tit-qq,qx}{Title in double quotes}{(``Title'', ..)} -\optdef{z}{tit-qq,qt-g,qx}{Title in guillemets}{(<<Title>>, ..)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\mytempfalse -\if\ans q\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans d\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans g\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans x\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans y\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans z\mytemptrue\fi -\beginoptiongroup{COLLECTION/PROCEEDINGS TITLES - (if quoted title)} - {\ifmytemp*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{bt-qq}{Quote collection and proceedings titles}{too} -\optdef{x}{}{Collection and proceedings titles not in quotes}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZATION OF ARTICLE TITLE:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Sentence style}{(capitalize first word and those in braces)} -\optdef{t}{atit-u}{Title style}{(just as in bib entry)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Article title present}{in journals and proceedings} -\optdef{x}{jtit-x}{No article title}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Journal names} -% Abbreviated journal names normally contain periods; the periods may be -% removed with this option. In fact, only letters, numbers, and spacing are -% retained. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAMES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Periods in journal names}{are retained, as `Phys. Rev.'} -\optdef{x}{jxper}{Dotless journal names}{as `Phys Rev'} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% Journal name is normally printed in italics; can be left in normal font. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME FONT:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Journal name italics}{} -\optdef{r}{jttl-rm}{Journal name normal}{font} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Title of Theses and Technical Reports} -% The title of a these (PhD or Master's) is normally treated the same -% as that of a book. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of -% an article. -% -% The title of a technical report is normally treated the same as that -% of an article. Optionally, it may be formatted like that of a book. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{THESIS TITLE:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Thesis titles like books}{} -\optdef{a}{thtit-a}{Thesis title like article}{} -\optdef{x}{thtit-x}{No thesis title}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report title like articles}{} -\optdef{b}{trtit-b}{Tech. report title like books}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{TECHNICAL REPORT NUMBER:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Tech. report and number plain}{as `Tech. Rep. 123'} -\optdef{i}{trnum-it}{Tech. report and number italic}% - {as `{\string\it\space Tech. Rep. 123'}} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Journal reference} -% Great diversity of opinion exists as to how a journal reference is to be -% formatted. It consists of a volume, possibly a number, and page limits. -% The number is really only necessary if the page numbers within one volume -% start at 1 for each physical `number'. Since journals are often bound -% together in one volume later, it makes more sense to number the pages -% continuously through the whole volume. -% -% I am only aware of one journal that used to reset the pagination for each -% `number', in which case the number was part of the page designation. -% I had erroneously provided an option \texttt{vnum-pg} to achieve this, but I -% now realize that instead, for this one journal, the database entries must -% contain \texttt{pages="(2)33--2(55)"}. This option has been removed at -% version 3.84. -% -% A number of styles for journal specifications are -% \begin{quote} -% \begin{tabular}{l@{\qquad}l} -% 21(2):33--55 & 21, no.\ 2: 33--55\\ -% \textbf{21}(2):33--55 & \textbf{21}, \#2, 33--55\\ -% \textit{21}(2), 33--55 & \textit{21} (2); 33--55 \\ -% 21(2) (1995) 33--55 & 21(1995), 33-55\\ -% 21(2) 33--55 & vol.~21 (2), pp.~33--55 -% \end{tabular} -% \end{quote} -% -% Here both start and stop page numbers have been given; often only the -% start page is wanted. -% -% It is also possible to include the year as part of the journal specification, -% in which case the year is always in parentheses, attached snugly or with space -% to the volume, or preceding the pages. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOLUME:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Volume plain}{as vol(num)} -\optdef{i}{vol-it}{Volume italic}{as {\string\em\space vol}(num)} -\optdef{b}{vol-bf}{Volume bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol}(num)} -\optdef{d}{vol-2bf}{Volume and number bold}{as {\string\bf\space vol(num)}} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The form of the `number' is also given: in parentheses, with `no.', -% with \#, or omitted. The \texttt{vnum-b} option is meant to be used -% with \texttt{jdt-v} and \texttt{jdt-vs} but could be used alone. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Journal vol(num)}{as 34(2)} -\optdef{s}{vnum-sp}{Journal vol (num)}{as 34 (2)} -\optdef{c}{vnum-cm}{Journal vol, num}{as 34, 2} -\optdef{n}{vnum-nr}{Journal vol, no. num}{as 34, no. 2} -\optdef{h}{vnum-h}{Journal vol, \string\# number}{as 34, \string\#2} -\optdef{b}{vnum-b}{Journal vol number}{as 34 2} -\optdef{x}{vnum-x}{Journal vol, without number}{as 34} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME PUNCTUATION:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Volume with colon}{as vol(num):ppp} -\optdef{s}{volp-sp}{Volume with colon and space}{as vol(num): ppp} -\optdef{h}{volp-semi}{Volume with semi-colon}{as vol(num); ppp} -\optdef{c}{volp-com}{Volume with comma}{as vol(num), ppp} -\optdef{b}{volp-blk}{Volume with blank}{as vol(num) ppp} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{YEAR IN JOURNAL SPECIFICATION:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Journal year like others}{as given by date position} -\optdef{v}{jdt-v}{Journal vol(year)}{as 34(1995)} -\optdef{s}{jdt-vs}{Journal vol (year)}{as 34 (1995)} -\optdef{p}{jdt-p}{Year with pages}{as 34(2), (1995) 1345--1387} -\optdef{c}{jdt-pc}{Year, comma, pages}{as 34(2), (1995), 1345--1387} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{PAGE NUMBERS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Start and stop page numbers}{given} -\optdef{f}{jpg-1}{Only start page number}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{LARGE PAGE NUMBERS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{No separators for large page numbers}{} -\optdef{c}{pgsep-c}{Comma inserted over 9999}{as 11,234} -\optdef{s}{pgsep-s}{Thin space inserted over 9999}{as 11 234} -\optdef{p}{pgsep-p}{Period inserted over 9999}{as 11.234} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{WORD `PAGE' IN ARTICLES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Article pages numbers only}{as 234-256} -\optdef{p}{jwdpg}{Include `page' in articles}{as pp. 234--256} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Some journals want page numbers at the end, even for books, proceedings, as -% well as for journals. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF PAGES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Pages given mid text}{as is normal} -\optdef{e}{pp-last}{Pages at end}{but before any notes} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{WORD `VOLUME' IN ARTICLES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Article volume as number only}{as 21} -\optdef{p}{jwdvol}{Include `volume' in articles}{as vol. 21} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Fiddle with the format and location of the number/series for collections and -% inproceedings. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR COLLECTIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{num-xser}{Allows number without series}{and suppresses word "number"} -\optdef{s}{}{Standard BibTeX}{as: "number 123 in Total Works"; error if number and no series} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{After chapter and pages}{as in standard BibTeX} -\optdef{t}{numser}{Just before publisher}{or organization} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Fiddle with the format and location of series and volume with books and collections. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Vol. 23 of Series}{as in standard BibTeX} -\optdef{s}{ser-vol}{Series, vol. 23}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Series and volume after the editors}{} -\optdef{e}{ser-ed}{Series and volume after booktitle}{and before editors} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% It is possible to decide whether the journal name should be -% separated from the following specifications with a blank or comma. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Comma after journal}{name} -\optdef{x}{jnm-x}{Space after journal}{name} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Books} -% The title of a book (as opposed to an article in a book or journal) is -% normally italicized. This may be set to the regular font. -% -% The page numbers in books may be set in parentheses, as (pp.\ 345--350). -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{BOOK TITLE:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Book title italic}{(\string\em)} -\optdef{p}{btit-rm,bt-rm}{Book title plain}{(no font command)} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{PAGES IN BOOKS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Pages in book plain}{as pp. 50-55} -\optdef{p}{bkpg-par}{Pages in book in parentheses}{as (pp. 50-55)} -\optdef{x}{bkpg-x}{Pages in book bare}{as 50-55} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{TOTAL PAGES OF A BOOK:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Total book pages not printed}{} -\optdef{p}{pg-bk}{For book: 345 pages}{or pp.} -\optdef{a}{pg-bk,pg-pre}{Total book pages before publisher}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% Some psychology journals wish to have the publisher's address preceding -% the name, separated by colon, as -% \begin{quote}New York: Wiley and Sons\end{quote} -% -% Some journals (e.g.\ Nature) put publisher in parentheses with date, -% as (Wiley and Sons, New York, 1983). These normally put the date in -% parentheses at the end anyway, so this is a merging of the two sets of -% parentheses. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER ADDRESS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Publisher, address}{as Harcourt, New York} -\optdef{a}{add-pub}{Address: Publisher}{as New York: Harcourt} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Publisher as normal block}{without parentheses} -\optdef{p}{pub-par}{Publisher in parentheses}{} -\optdef{d}{pub-date}{Publisher and date in parentheses}{(Oxford, 1994)} -\optdef{c}{pub-date,pub-xc}{Publisher and date in parentheses, no comma}{(Oxford 1994)} -\optdef{f}{pub-date,pub-xpar}{Publisher and date without parentheses}{Oxford, 1994} -\optdef{k}{pub-date,pub-xpar,pub-xc}{Publisher and date, no parentheses, no comma}{Oxford 1994} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{PUBLISHER POSITION:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Publisher after chapter, pages}{} -\optdef{p}{pre-pub}{Publisher before chapter, pages}{} -\optdef{e}{pre-edn}{Publisher after edition}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{ISBN, ISSN, DOI numbers} -% Books normally possess an ISBN number. This may be included as an -% optional entry for \texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{booklet}, -% \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{proceedings}, \texttt{inproceedings}. -% However, it should be suppressed for \texttt{inbook} etc.\ when -% there is a crossref to another book with the ISBN number. -% -% Periodicals contain an ISSN number. Add this to \texttt{article}, or -% course, but also to \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings}, since -% they are sometimes printed in a periodical. -% -% Journal articles that appear online are given a DOI number, something more -% robust than a URL that can change as machines are upgraded. -% The American Geophysical Union (AGU) uses the DOI as part of the -% page number substitution for electronic journals, placing the number -% where the pages would normally appear. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{ISBN NUMBER:}{} -\optdef{*}{isbn}{Include ISBN}{for books, booklets, etc.} -\optdef{x}{}{No ISBN}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{ISSN NUMBER:}{} -\optdef{*}{issn}{Include ISSN}{for periodicals} -\optdef{x}{}{No ISSN}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{DOI NUMBER:}{} -\optdef{*}{doi}{Include DOI}{as "doi: number"} -\optdef{u}{url-doi}{Format DOI as URL //doi.org/doi}{(must give url options!)} -\optdef{a}{agu-doi,doi}{Insert DOI AGU style}{as part of page number} -\optdef{x}{}{No DOI}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Editor of book without author} -% -% This is normally -% \begin{quote} -% J. K. James, editor -% \end{quote} -% but may also be -% \begin{quote} -% J. K. James, (editor)\\ -% J. K. James (editor), -% \end{quote} -% Alternatively, the word \textsl{editor} may be capitalized and/or -% abbreviated. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES (EDITED BOOKS WITHOUT AUTHORS):}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Word `editor' after name}{} -\optdef{a}{edpar}{`Name (editor),'}{in parentheses, after name, comma after} -\optdef{b}{edpar,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor),'}{as above, editor upper case} -\optdef{c}{edparc}{`Name, (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, comma between} -\optdef{d}{edparc,bkedcap}{`Name, (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case} -\optdef{e}{edparxc}{`Name (editor)'}{in parentheses, after name, no commas} -\optdef{f}{edparxc,bkedcap}{`Name (Editor)'}{as above, editor upper case} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Edited by} -% For an article within an edited collection, the normal form is -% \begin{quote} -% In J. K. James, editor, \emph{Title of Collection} \dots -% \end{quote} -% Alternative forms are -% \begin{quote} -% In J. K. James (editor), \emph{Title} \dots\\ -% In \emph{Title}, edited by J. K. James \dots\\ -% In \emph{Title} (Edited by J. K. James) \dots -% \end{quote} -% If none of the \texttt{edby} variations is used, then the same system is -% used as for edited books, i.e. \texttt{edpar} applies. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Same as for edited book}{(names before booktitle)} -\optdef{b}{edby}{In booktitle, edited by .. }{(where .. is names)} -\optdef{p}{edby-par}{In booktitle (edited by ..)}{} -\optdef{c}{edby-parc}{In booktitle, (edited by ..)}{} -\optdef{e}{edby,edbyx}{In booktitle, editor ..}{} -\optdef{f}{edby,edbyw}{In booktitle, (editor) ..}{} -\optdef{k}{edby-par,edbyx}{In booktitle (editor..)}{} -\optdef{g}{edby-parc,edbyx}{In booktitle, (editor..)}{} -\optdef{j}{edby,edbyy}{In booktitle, .., editor}{} -\optdef{m}{edby-par,edbyy}{In booktitle (.., editor)}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\mytempfalse -\if\ans p\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans k\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans f\mytemptrue\fi -\beginoptiongroup{CAPITALIZE `EDITOR' OR `EDITED BY' - (if editor capitalizable)} - {\ifmytemp*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{`(editor,..)' or `(edited by..)'}{in lower case} -\optdef{c}{edcap}{`(Editor,..)' or `(Edited by..)'}{in upper case} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Block punctuation} -% Blocks are logical sections of the reference specification, such as the -% author block, the journal block, editor block, etc. These are normally -% separated by periods, but alternatively a comma may be used. Another -% choice is to use commas except after titles where a period is given. -% -% \LaTeX\ offers an \texttt{openbib} option, which means that the blocks -% are not only new sentences, but new lines as well. This can only -% function when the default option here is taken, for then the command -% |\newblock| is placed between the blocks. This command is normally -% defined to do nothing, but \LaTeX\ redefines it to issue a new line -% when open bibliographies are wanted. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS):}{} -\optdef{*}{}{\string\newblock\space after blocks} - {(periods or new lines with openbib option)} -\optdef{c}{blk-com}{Comma between blocks}{} -\optdef{s}{blk-com,com-semi}{Semi-colon between blocks}{} -\optdef{b}{blk-com,com-blank}{Blanks between blocks}{} -\optdef{t}{blk-tit}{Period after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas} -\optdef{u}{blk-tit,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles, books, etc}{else commas} -\optdef{a}{blk-tita}{Period after titles of articles}{else commas} -\optdef{d}{blk-tita,tit-col}{Colon after titles of articles}{else commas} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\mytempfalse -\if\ans c\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans s\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans b\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans t\mytemptrue\fi -\if\ans a\mytemptrue\fi -\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION BEFORE NOTES - (if not using \string\newblock)} - {\ifmytemp*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{Notes have regular punctuation}{like all other blocks} -\optdef{p}{blknt}{Notes preceded by period}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER AUTHORS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Author block normal}{with regular block punctuation} -\optdef{c}{au-col}{Author block with colon}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{\textsl{In} with colon} -% When referring to works in a collection, one begins the block describing -% that collection with \textsl{In}. Optionally, one may add a colon. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{PUNCTUATION AFTER `IN':}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Space after `in'}{for incollection or inproceedings} -\optdef{c}{in-col}{Colon after `in'}{(as `In: ...')} -\optdef{i}{in-it}{Italic `in'}{and space} -\optdef{d}{in-col,in-it}{Italic `in' and colon}{} -\optdef{x}{in-x}{No word `in'}{for edited works} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{`IN' WITH JOURNAL NAMES - (if using 'in' with collections)} - {\if\ans x\else*\fi} -\optdef{*}{}{No `in' before journal name}{} -\optdef{i}{injnl}{Add `in' before journal name}{in style for incollection} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Final punctuation} -% The punctuation at the end of the reference is normally a period. This -% may be suppressed. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{FINAL PUNCTUATION:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Period at very end}{of the listed reference} -\optdef{x}{fin-bare}{No period at end}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Abbreviations} -% A number of words may be abbreviated: pages, editors, volume, chapter, -% and so on. The first two may be independently set to abbreviation, the -% rest with a single option. -% -% Additionally, the edition numbers may be -% output as words (first, second, etc.) or as numbers (1st, 2nd, etc.). -% (Recall that the input in the \texttt{.bib} file is always as English -% words.) -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' - (if not using external language file)} - {\if!\cfile!\relax*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{`Page(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} -\optdef{a}{pp}{`Page' abbreviated}{as p. or pp.} -\optdef{x}{ppx}{`Page' omitted}{} -\getans -\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS':}{} -\optdef{*}{}{`Editor(s)'}{(no abbreviation)} -\optdef{a}{ed}{`Editor' abbreviated}{as ed. or eds.} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{No abbreviations}{of volume, edition, chapter, etc} -\optdef{a}{abr}{Abbreviations}{of such words} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' - (if abbreviating words)} - {\if\ans a*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{}{`Edition' abbreviated as `edn'}{} -\optdef{a}{ednx}{`Edition' abbreviated as `ed'}{} -\getans -\beginoptiongroup{MONTHS WITH DOTS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Months with dots}{as Jan.} -\optdef{x}{mth-bare}{Months without dots}{as Feb Mar} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{EDITION NUMBERS:}{} -\optdef{*}{xedn}{Editions as in database}{saving much processing memory} -\optdef{w}{}{Write out editions}{as first, second, third, etc} -\optdef{n}{ord}{Numerical editions}{as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The above choices about abbreviations are made only if the internal -% languages are taken (English or \texttt{babel}). For an external language -% definition file, these choices, along with possible other ones, are made -% in the external file, which is read in at this point. -% \begin{macrocode} -\umes{Reading external language file \string\cfile=\cfile}% -\if!\cfile!\relax\else - \input\cfile -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This file contains the standard set of stored journal names present in -% the basic bibliography style files. If other files containing journal -% names are to be included, they may only contain the options \texttt{jabr} -% or \texttt{jaa} since these options are selected here. No option -% menus from the journal-name files will be read in. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{STORED JOURNAL NAMES:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Full journal names}{for prestored journals} -\optdef{a}{jabr}{Abbreviated journal names}{} -\optdef{s}{jabr,jaa}{Abbreviated with astronomy shorthands}{like ApJ and AJ} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Variations on \textsl{and}} -% It is possible to replace the word \textsl{and} with an ampersand \&, and to -% specify whether a comma is to precede \textsl{and} in a list of more than two -% names. -% -% A variable \textsl{and} may be provided for with the command |\BIBand| -% in place of the word. In this case, the command must be defined in the -% document file or some other package called. (This is intended for situations -% where an ampersand is wanted in parenthetical citations, but the word in -% textual ones.) -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{AMPERSAND:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Use word `and'}{in author lists} -\optdef{a}{amper}{Use ampersand}{in place of `and'} -\optdef{v}{varand}{Use \string\BIBand}{in place of `and'} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND':}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, and Harry'} -\optdef{n}{and-xcom}{No comma before `and'}{as `Tom, Dick and Harry'} -\optdef{c}{and-com}{Comma even with 2 authors}{as `Tom, and Harry'} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `AND' EVEN FOR COLLECTION EDITORS - (if using comma before `and' with authors)} - {\if\ans c*\fi}% -\optdef{*}{and-com-ed}{Comma with 2 editors}{in collections} -\optdef{x}{}{Two editors without comma}{as `Tom and Harry'} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\beginoptiongroup{NO `AND' IN REFERENCE LIST:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{With `and'}{before last author in reference list} -\optdef{x}{xand}{No `and'}{as `Tom, Dick, Harry'} -\getans -\endoptiongroup - -\beginoptiongroup{COMMA BEFORE `ET AL':}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Comma before `et al'}{in reference list} -\optdef{x}{etal-xc}{No comma before `et al'}{} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Font of \textsl{et al}} -% One can chose that \textsl{et~al.}\ be put into italics. -% Or, if the authors are in a different font from the regular one, the -% \textsl{et~al.}\ can still be Roman. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{FONT OF `ET AL':}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Plain et al}{} -\optdef{i}{etal-it}{Italic et al}{} -\optdef{r}{etal-rm}{Roman et al}{even when authors something else} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Additional Data Fields}\label{sec:revtex} -% The American Physical Society's REV\TeX\ package contains \btx\ support -% with a \texttt{bst} file generated from a variant of -% \texttt{\filename}. The extra fields are also available here. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \textbf{collaboration}: A collaboration name associated with a -% reference. -% \item \textbf{eprint}: The e-print citation for the reference (Los Alamos -% or otherwise). E-print numbers can be turned into hyperlinks to the -% online article. The output is\\ -% \hspace*{2em}|\eprint{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}| -% \item \textbf{archive}: is an optional argument for |\eprint|, as\\ -% \hspace*{2em}|\eprint[|\textit{archive-des}|]{|\textit{eprint-spec}|}|\\ -% The \textit{archive-des} is some code such as \texttt{arXiv} that is -% translated to a base URL by a class or package file. The default definition -% of |\eprint| ignores \textit{archive-des} and prints \textit{eprint-spec} -% as a URL. -% \item \textbf{url}: A URL associated with the reference. Can be turned -% into a hyperlink. -% \end{itemize} -% -% A collaboration appears as part of the author list and the other two -% appear at the end of the citaton. The URL field can be selected -% independently of this option. -% -% In addition there are new fields for journals like Phys.\ Rev.~D that -% no longer use page numbers. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item \textbf{eid}: Electronic article identifier. -% \item \textbf{numpages}: Number of pages in an article. For use in -% conjunction with the \textbf{eid} field when page counts are -% desired. Deprecated when submitting to Phys.\ Rev. -% -% The \texttt{eprint} (with \texttt{archive}) and \texttt{url} fields may be -% included independently of the other REV\TeX\ fields. -% -% The \texttt{eid} field is now always included, although it is optional for -% the bibliography entries. This electronic identifier is a replacement for the -% page number in electronic journals: it is the sequence number in the printed -% volume. If present, it will be used in place of the page number. -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{No additional fields}{for REVTeX} -\optdef{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk}{Include REVTeX data fields} - {collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, numpages, url} -\getans -\mytemptrue -\if\ans r\mytempfalse\fi -\beginoptiongroup{E-PRINT DATA FIELD: -(without REVTeX fields)} -{\ifmytemp*\fi} -\optdef{*}{}{Do not include eprint field}{} -\optdef{e}{eprint}{Include eprint and archive fields}{for electronic publications} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{URL address} -% For electronic documents with an Internet address, add a URL entry. -% Harvard already has this, but here it is done for all styles. -% The URL text will be set with the \verb!\url! command in the \texttt{url} -% package by Donald Arseneau. This package must be loaded for the command -% to work right. It allows line breaks at punctuations. Otherwise, -% \verb!\texttt! is used instead, with no line breaks. The URL text is preceded -% by \verb!\urlprefix! which defaults to ``URL '' but may be redefined by the -% user to be whatever s/he wants. The final space must be included. -% -% Note: selecting the REV\TeX\ fields automatically includes this, so the -% offer only is made if REV\TeX\ has been rejected. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{URL ADDRESS: -(without REVTeX fields)}{\ifmytemp*\fi} -\optdef{*}{}{No URL}{for electronic (Internet) documents} -\optdef{u}{url,url-blk}{Include URL}{as regular item block} -\optdef{n}{url,url-nt}{URL as note}{} -\optdef{l}{url,url-nl}{URL on new line}{after rest of reference} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Reference Component Tagging} -% If reference component tagging is enabled, we -% apply tags like |\bibinfo| and |\eprint| to the fields of data -% in the content of the |\bibitem| statement. We also ensure that -% these commands have a default meaning within the scope of the |thebibliography| -% environment. The default definitions simply print the field and ignore the -% tag. However, other programs or packages might make use of the tag -% information to separate authors from title, for example. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS:}{} -\optdef{*}{}{No reference component tags} - {in the \string\bibitem\space entries} -\optdef{b}{bibinfo}{Reference component tags} - {like \string\bibinfo\space in the content of \string\bibitem} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Define emphasis} -% In everything that been mentioned so far, italicization should be -% understood to mean `emphasize' in the \LaTeX{} sense. This means that the -% command |\em| is used. This is not the same as |\it|, which is always -% italics. Rather, with |\em|, the font style switches between |\rm| and -% |\it| depending on the context. Here one may choose to true italics, or -% to switch off italics altogether. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{EMPHASIS: - (affects all so-called italics)}{} -\optdef{*}{}{Use emphasis}{ie, \string\em, allows font switching} -\optdef{i}{em-it}{Use true italics}{ie, \string\it, absolute italics} -\optdef{x}{em-x}{No italics}{at all} -\optdef{u}{em-ul}{Underlining}{in place of italics, best with ulem package} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection*{Plain \TeX\ compatibility} -% Bold face, italics, and emphasis are made with the \LaTeXe\ commands, -% which makes them incompatible with the obsolete \LaTeX2.09, and with -% Plain \TeX. There are also some extra testing for existing commands -% that best work with \LaTeXe\ syntax. -% -% If the bibliography style file is to be fully compatible with Plain \TeX, -% do not select the option \texttt{nfss} but do take \texttt{plntx}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\beginoptiongroup{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX:}{} -\optdef{*}{nfss}{Use LaTeX commands}{which may not work with Plain TeX} -\optdef{t}{plntx}{Use only Plain TeX}{commands for fonts and testing} -\getans -\endoptiongroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Terminate the options list. If a language definition file has been called, -% then we have a closing brace too many, so add another dummy opening brace. -% \begin{macrocode} -\if!\cfile\jfile!\else -\begingroup\MBswitch -\wr(,{\pc) -\endgroup -\fi - -\endoptions -%</options> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The Bibliographic Coding} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!options&!driver&!bblbst> -%<*!tail> - % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later - % ------------------------------------------------------------------- -%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> - % WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING - % The input dbj file contains one of the options -%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft-it, nmft-bf, nmft-sc, or nmft-def -%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab-it, lab-bf, lab-sc, or lab-def - % without the corresponding general option(s): -%<nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def> % nmft -%<lab-it|lab-sc|lab-bf|lab-def> % lab - % (You may be using an older dbj with a newer version of merlin.mbs) - % Please edit your dbj file to add the general option(s) and reprocess. - % -%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> -%<*!exlang> -%<!babel> % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH -%<*babel> - % This bibliography style file requires a file named babelbst.tex - % containing the definitions of word commands like \bbleditor, etc. -%</babel> -%</!exlang> -%<*exlang> - % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in -%<bahasa> % BAHASA -%<brazilian> % BRAZILIAN -%<catalan> % CATALAN -%<croatian> % CROATIAN -%<czech> % CZECH -%<danish> % DANISH -%<dansk> % DANSK -%<dutch> % DUTCH -%<english> % ENGLISH -%<esperanto> % ESPERANTO -%<finnish> % FINNISH -%<french> % FRENCH -%<galacian> % GALACIAN -%<german> % GERMAN -%<hungarian> % HUNGARIAN -%<italian> % ITALIAN -%<norwegian> % NORWEGIAN -%<norsk> % NORWEGIAN -%<polski> % POLISH -%<polish> % POLISH -%<portuguese> % PORTUGUESE -%<romanian> % ROMANIAN -%<russian> % RUSSIAN -%<slovak> % SLOVAK -%<slovenian> % SLOVENIAN -%<slovene> % SLOVENIAN -%<spanish> % SPANISH -%<swedish> % SWEDISH -%<turkish> % TURKISH -%</exlang> -%<*!html> -%<*ay> - % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is - % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly. - % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly -%<*alk> - % or: apalike.sty by Oren Patashnik - % The form of the \bibitem entries is - % \bibitem[Jones et al., 1990]{key}... -%</alk> -%<*!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)> - % The form of the \bibitem entries is - % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}... -%<nat> % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}... - % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists - % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year - % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening - % parenthesis! -%<nat> % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year. - % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is - % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must - % be parentheses in the label. - % The \cite command functions as follows: - % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990) -%<nat> % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990) - % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990) -%<nat> % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990) - % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2) - % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990) - % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990, p. 32) - % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al. -%<nat> % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith - % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990 -%</!(har|ast|alk|cay|nmd|cn)> -%<*har> - % or: harvard.sty by Peter Williams and Thorsten Schnier -%<harnm> % (needs natbib v5.3 or harvard v2.0.3) - % The form of the bibitem entries is - % \harvarditem[Jones et al.]{Jones, Baker, and Smith}{1990}{key}... -%</har> -%<*cay> - % or: chicago.sty - % The form of the bibitem entries is - % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones, Baker, and Smith} - % {Jones et al.}{1990}{key}... -%</cay> -%<*nmd> - % or: named.sty - % The form of the bibitem entries is - % \bibitem[\protect\citeauthoryear{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... -%</nmd> -%<*ast> - % or: astron.sty - % The form of the bibitem entries is - % \bibitem[\protect\astroncite{Jones et al.}{1990}]{key}... -%</ast> -%<*cn> - % or: authordate1-4.sty - % The form of the bibitem entries is - % \bibitem[\protect\citename{Jones et al.}1990]{key}... -%</cn> -%</ay> -%<*!ay> -%<*!alph&!cite> - % This is a numerical citation style, and as such is standard LaTeX. -%</!alph&!cite> -%<*alph> - % This is a labelled citation style similar to the standard alpha.bst, - % where labels are of the form Dal90 or DBK89. -%</alph> -%<*cite&!alph> - % This is a special pseudo-numerical bibliography style, intended to be - % used to list all the entries in a bib database -%</cite&!alph> - % It requires no extra package to interface to the main text. - % The form of the \bibitem entries is -%<!alph&!cite> % \bibitem{key}... -%<alph> % \bibitem[label]{key}... -%<!alph&cite> % \bibitem[key]{key}... -%<*!cite|alph> - % Usage of \cite is as follows: -%<*!alph&!cite> - % \cite{key} ==>> [#] - % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [#, chap. 2] - % where # is a number determined by the ordering in the reference list. -%</!alph&!cite> -%<*alph> - % \cite{key} ==>> [label] - % \cite[chap. 2]{key} ==>> [label, chap. 2] - % The order in the reference list is by label. -%</alph> -%<*seq-no&!alph> - % The order in the reference list is that by which the works were originally - % cited in the text, or that in the database. -%</seq-no&!alph> -%<*!seq-no&!alph> - % The order in the reference list is alphabetical by authors. -%</!seq-no&!alph> -%</!cite|alph> -%</!ay> -%</!html> -%<*html> - % This bibliographic style file produces HTML output instead of LaTeX. - % The LaTeX special characters are not translated, so that the output - % (which has the .bbl ending still) will have to be further massaged, - % and renamed with .html or .htm. The title and heading may also need - % to be revised. - % -%<htlist&!htdes> % The output is a numbered list. -%<htdes> % The output is an unnumbered list with the keys printed -%<htdes> % before each entry. -%<!htlist&!htdes> % The output is lists each entry as one paragraph. -%</html> - % ------------------------------------------------------------------- - -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`ENTRY'} -% The new \texttt{harvard.sty} of \LaTeXe{} includes an entry URL, or -% rather it is included in the new \texttt{.bst} files for it. Add it -% here too, but only for option \texttt{harnm}. -% -% Books normally have an ISBN number. -% This entry is (optionally) included, modelled after that in -% \texttt{xbtxbst.doc}. -% \begin{macrocode} -ENTRY - { address -%<annote> annote -%<eprint> archive - author - booktitle - chapter -%<revdata> collaboration -%<doi|url-doi> doi - edition - editor - eid -%<eprint> eprint - howpublished - institution -%<isbn> isbn -%<issn> issn - journal - key -%<lang> language - month - note - number -%<revdata> numpages - organization - pages - publisher - school - series - title - type -%<url|harnm|revdata> url - volume - year - } - {} -%<!ay&!alph> { label } -%<!ay&alph> { label extra.label sort.label } -%<ay> { label extra.label sort.label short.list } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`init.state.consts'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% |s| and |t| are general-purpose scratch registers whose value does not persist -% past the end of a function. They also do not appear to be used to communicate -% between functions or to be clobbered within a sub-function call. Hopefully. -% \begin{macrocode} -STRINGS { s t} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`output.nonnull'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = -%<!blk-com|(!com-semi&!com-blank)> { ", " * write$ } -%<blk-com&com-semi> { "; " * write$ } -%<blk-com&!com-semi&com-blank> { " " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { add.period$ write$ - newline$ -%<!html> "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`output'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`output.check'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`fin.entry'} -% I have often been asked to add an annotation function. This suggestion is -% from Soren Dayton; it inputs a file with the same name as the cite key, or -% uses the text in the \texttt{annote} field. It will only work with \LaTeXe. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -%<*!fin-bare> -{ add.period$ - write$ -%</!fin-bare> -%<*fin-bare> -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'write$ - if$ -%</fin-bare> -%<html&htdes> "</dd>" write$ -%<html&!htdes&htlist> "</li>" write$ -%<html&!htdes&!htlist> "</p>" write$ - newline$ -%<*annote> -%<*!html> - annote missing$ - { "\bibAnnoteFile{" cite$ * "}" * write$ newline$ } - { "\bibAnnote{" cite$ * "}{" * annote * "}" * write$ newline$ - } - if$ -%</!html> -%<*html> - "<blockquote><strong>Key:</strong> " - cite$ * write$ - annote missing$ - { newline$ } - { "<br><strong>Annotation:</strong>" write$ newline$ - annote write$ newline$ - } - if$ - "</blockquote>" write$ newline$ -%</html> -%</annote> -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`new.block'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ output.state after.block = - 'skip$ - { output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.sentence 'output.state := } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`add.blank'} -% When text is printed with \texttt{output} or -% \texttt{output.check}, the \texttt{output.state} is set such that -% a comma will precede the next output text. For special effects, we want to -% suppress this comma, inserting a blank instead. Hence the -% \texttt{output.state} is changed to \texttt{before.all}, meaning no -% punctuation is to be inserted. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {add.blank} -{ " " * before.all 'output.state := -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`add.colon'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*au-col|tit-col> -FUNCTION {add.colon} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { ":" * add.blank } - if$ -} - -%</au-col|tit-col> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`no.blank.or.punct'} -% Another frill is to suppresss both blanks and punctuation. The |\hspace| -% permits a line break at this point. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*yrpp-xsp> -FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct} -%<*!html> -{ "\hspace{0pt}" * before.all 'output.state := -} -%</!html> -%<html>{ before.all 'output.state := } - -%</yrpp-xsp> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`date.block'} -% The \texttt{date.block} function is used for special punctuating effects -% after the date. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {date.block} -{ -%<*!yrp-x> -%<yrp-col> ":" * -%<*!yrp-col> -%<yrp-semi> ";" * -%<*!yrp-semi> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&!yrp-per> skip$ -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&yrp-per> new.sentence -%</!yrp-semi> -%</!yrp-col> -%</!yrp-x> -%<*yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi> -%<!yrpp-xsp> add.blank -%<yrpp-xsp> no.blank.or.punct -%</yrp-x|yrp-col|yrp-semi> -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`not'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`and'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`or'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`non.stop'} -% This function (my invention) tests if the last character in the string -% on the stack is \texttt{. ! ?} by using \texttt{add.period\$}. It is to -% be used for conditional italic correction or adding commas. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!tit-it&tit-qq> -FUNCTION {non.stop} -{ duplicate$ - "}" * add.period$ - #-1 #1 substring$ "." = -} - -%</!tit-it&tit-qq> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`remove.dots'} -% This macro removes any periods from the string on the stack. To be used -% for undotting journal names, months, and juniors. Previously -% \texttt{purify\$} was used for this, but that removes more than just -% dots. -% -% May 2007, Joseph A. Wright (Morning Star, UK) contributed a revision to allow -% the dot accent |\.| to be retained. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper> -STRINGS {z} - -FUNCTION {remove.dots} -{ 'z := - "" - { z empty$ not } - { z #1 #2 substring$ - duplicate$ "\." = - { z #3 global.max$ substring$ 'z := * } - { pop$ - z #1 #1 substring$ - z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z := - duplicate$ "." = 'pop$ - { * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -%</nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|mth-bare|jxper> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checka'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay> -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -%</!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`new.block.checkb'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checka'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay> -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -%</!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`new.sentence.checkb'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay> -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -%</!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`field.or.null'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`emphasize'} -% Emphasis can be either italic or the alternating font. The font command -% may be NFSS or regular \LaTeX~2.09 declarations. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -%<*!em-x> -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } -%<html> { "<i>" swap$ * "</i>" * } -%<*!html> -%<em-ul> { "\uline{" swap$ * "}" * } -%<*!em-ul> -%<*!nfss> -%<!em-it> { "{\em " swap$ * "\/}" * } -%<em-it> { "{\it " swap$ * "\/}" * } -%</!nfss> -%<*nfss> -%<!em-it> { "\emph{" swap$ * "}" * } -%<em-it> { "\textit{" swap$ * "}" * } -%</nfss> -%</!em-ul> -%</!html> - if$ -} -%</!em-x> -%<em-x>{ skip$ } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`bolden'} -% The bold font command may be NFSS or the regular \LaTeX~2.09 declaration. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf> -FUNCTION {bolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } -%<html> { "<b>" swap$ * "</b>" * } -%<*!html> -%<!nfss> { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } -%<nfss> { "\textbf{" swap$ * "}" * } -%</!html> - if$ -} -%</nmft-bf|vol-bf|vol-2bf|lab-bf|dtbf|pres-bf> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`scaps'} -% To put text into small caps. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc> -FUNCTION {scaps} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } -%<html> { skip$ } -%<*!html> -%<!nfss> { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * } -%<nfss> { "\textsc{" swap$ * "}" * } -%</!html> - if$ -} -%</lab-sc|nmft-sc|pres-sc> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`bib.name.font'} -% \begin{macro}{`bib.fname.font'} -% \begin{macro}{`cite.name.font'} -% Define functions for formatting the author/editor names, one for the -% surnames (\texttt{bib.name.font}) and one for the first names -% (\texttt{bib.fname.font}). These could be identical, or the latter is -% deactivated if first names are not to be formatted, only the last names. -% -% For citations, we have \texttt{cite.name.font}. Here only surnames appear. -% -% It is also possible to have a user-defined font command for each, which the -% user must define in his work. These are |\bibnamefont{}| and |\bibfnamefont{}|, -% and some defaults are provided that simply repeat the arguments. Two commands -% are needed if \texttt{nmft-def} and \texttt{fnm-def} are both given. -% -% If neither \texttt{fnm-def} nor \texttt{fnm-rm} are given, then the first names -% are formatted the same as the surnames. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*nmft> -FUNCTION {bib.name.font} -%<nmft-it>{ emphasize } -%<!nmft-it&nmft-bf>{ bolden } -%<!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&nmft-sc>{ scaps } -%<*!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def> -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } -%<!html> { "\bibnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * } -%<html> { skip$ } - if$ -} -%</!nmft-it&!nmft-bf&!nmft-sc&nmft-def> -FUNCTION {bib.fname.font} -%<!fnm-rm&!fnm-def>{ bib.name.font } -%<fnm-rm>{ skip$ } -%<*!fnm-rm&fnm-def> -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } -%<!html> { "\bibfnamefont{" swap$ * "}" * } -%<html> { skip$ } - if$ -} -%</!fnm-rm&fnm-def> -%</nmft> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*lab> -FUNCTION {cite.name.font} -%<lab-it>{ emphasize } -%<!lab-it&lab-bf>{ bolden } -%<!lab-it&!lab-bf&lab-sc>{ scaps } -%<*!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def> -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } -%<!html> { "\citenamefont{" swap$ * "}" * } -%<html> { skip$ } - if$ -} -%</!lab-it&!lab-bf&!lab-sc&lab-def> -%</lab> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`tie.or.space.prefix'} -% The function \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} determines whether -% the top item on the stack requires a tie character and -% slips that (or a space character if not) ahead of it. -% At this point a font switch or other function can be applied to -% the top item on the stack, and the appropriate space found -% just ahead of it on the stack. -% -% The sequence \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix} \texttt{*} \texttt{*} is a common idiom -% for joining the top two stack objects with a tie or space -% depending on the length of the top object. -% -% Another idiom is to apply \texttt{tie.or.space.prefix}, apply a font switch, -% and then swap and join. In this case the tie or space follows the object. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`capitalize'} -% Capitalizing is easy for regular languages, but for \texttt{babel}, -% some trickery stuff is needed; definitions of |\capitalize| and -% |\Capitalize| are written to the \texttt{.bbl} file. -% \begin{macrocode} - -FUNCTION {capitalize} -%<!babel>{ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$ } -%<babel>{ "\capitalize" swap$ * } - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`space.word'} -% The function \texttt{space.word} adds a space before and after the word or -% words currently on the stack. This was added for the \texttt{bbl.}$nnn$ -% functions, that contain only a word without spacing, but replace explicit -% text in the originals that were spaced out. Its seems more flexible to -% define the word functions to be without spacing. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {space.word} -{ " " swap$ * " " * } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words. - % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word. -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!exlang> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`bbl.xxx'} -% These are the default English words. There is no default language -% option: one of \texttt{english} or \texttt{babel} must be given. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!babel> - % The language selected here is ENGLISH -FUNCTION {bbl.and} -%<!varand|html>{ "and"} -%<varand&!html>{ "\protect\BIBand{}"} - -FUNCTION {bbl.etal} -{ "et~al." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.editors} -%<!ed>{ "editors" } -%<ed>{ "eds." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.editor} -%<!ed>{ "editor" } -%<ed>{ "ed." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.edby} -{ "edited by" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.edition} -%<!abr>{ "edition" } -%<abr&!ednx>{ "edn." } -%<abr&ednx>{ "ed." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.volume} -%<!abr>{ "volume" } -%<abr>{ "vol." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.of} -{ "of" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.number} -%<!abr>{ "number" } -%<abr>{ "no." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.nr} -{ "no." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.in} -{ "in" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.pages} -%<!pp&!ppx>{ "pages" } -%<pp>{ "pp." } -%<!pp&ppx>{ "" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.page} -%<!pp&!ppx>{ "page" } -%<pp>{ "p." } -%<!pp&ppx>{ "" } - -%<*revdata> -FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp} -{ "pages" } - -%</revdata> -FUNCTION {bbl.chapter} -%<!abr>{ "chapter" } -%<abr>{ "chap." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.techrep} -%<!abr>{ "Technical Report" } -%<abr>{ "Tech. Rep." } - -FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis} -{ "Master's thesis" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis} -{ "Ph.D. thesis" } - -%<*!xedn> -FUNCTION {bbl.first} -%<!ord>{ "First" } -%<ord>{ "1st" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.second} -%<!ord>{ "Second" } -%<ord>{ "2nd" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.third} -%<!ord>{ "Third" } -%<ord>{ "3rd" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.fourth} -%<!ord>{ "Fourth" } -%<ord>{ "4th" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.fifth} -%<!ord>{ "Fifth" } -%<ord>{ "5th" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.st} -{ "st" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.nd} -{ "nd" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.rd} -{ "rd" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.th} -{ "th" } - -%</!xedn> -%<*!abr> -MACRO {jan} {"January"} - -MACRO {feb} {"February"} - -MACRO {mar} {"March"} - -MACRO {apr} {"April"} - -MACRO {may} {"May"} - -MACRO {jun} {"June"} - -MACRO {jul} {"July"} - -MACRO {aug} {"August"} - -MACRO {sep} {"September"} - -MACRO {oct} {"October"} - -MACRO {nov} {"November"} - -MACRO {dec} {"December"} - -%</!abr> -%<*abr> -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} - -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} - -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} - -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} - -MACRO {may} {"May"} - -MACRO {jun} {"Jun."} - -MACRO {jul} {"Jul."} - -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} - -MACRO {sep} {"Sep."} - -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} - -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} - -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} - -%</abr> -%</!babel> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here are the definitions for \texttt{babel} option, i.e., explicit -% translations are not used, but rather only \LaTeX{} macros that must be -% defined in the file \texttt{babelbst.tex}. This could allow automatic -% language selection. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*babel> - % The BABEL language selection is made here; definitions in babelbst.tex. -FUNCTION {bbl.and} -{ "\bbland{}"} - -FUNCTION {bbl.etal} -{ "\bbletal{}"} - -FUNCTION {bbl.editors} -%<!ed>{ "\bbleditors{}" } -%<ed>{ "\bbleds{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.editor} -%<!ed>{ "\bbleditor{}" } -%<ed>{ "\bbled{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.edby} -{ "\bbledby{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.edition} -%<!abr>{ "\bbledition{}" } -%<abr>{ "\bbledn{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.volume} -%<!abr>{ "\bblvolume{}" } -%<abr>{ "\bblvol{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.of} -{ "\bblof{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.number} -%<!abr>{ "\bblnumber{}" } -%<abr>{ "\bblno{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.nr} -{ "\bblno{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.in} -{ "\bblin{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.pages} -%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpages{}" } -%<pp>{ "\bblpp{}" } -%<!pp&ppx>{ "" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.page} -%<!pp&!ppx>{ "\bblpage{}" } -%<pp>{ "\bblp{}" } -%<!pp&ppx>{ "" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.chapter} -%<!abr>{ "\bblchapter{}" } -%<abr>{ "\bblchap{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.techrep} -%<!abr>{ "\bbltechreport{}" } -%<abr>{ "\bbltechrep{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis} -{ "\bblmthesis{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis} -{ "\bblphdthesis{}" } - -%<*revdata> -FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp} -{ "\bbleidpp{}" } - -%</revdata> -%<*!xedn> -FUNCTION {bbl.first} -%<!ord>{ "\bblfirst{}" } -%<ord>{ "\bblfirsto{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.second} -%<!ord>{ "\bblsecond{}" } -%<ord>{ "\bblsecondo{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.third} -%<!ord>{ "\bblthird{}" } -%<ord>{ "\bblthirdo{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.fourth} -%<!ord>{ "\bblfourth{}" } -%<ord>{ "\bblfourtho{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.fifth} -%<!ord>{ "\bblfifth{}" } -%<ord>{ "\bblfiftho{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.st} -{ "\bblst{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.nd} -{ "\bblnd{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.rd} -{ "\bblrd{}" } - -FUNCTION {bbl.th} -{ "\bblth{}" } - -%</!xedn> -MACRO {jan} {"\bbljan{}"} - -MACRO {feb} {"\bblfeb{}"} - -MACRO {mar} {"\bblmar{}"} - -MACRO {apr} {"\bblapr{}"} - -MACRO {may} {"\bblmay{}"} - -MACRO {jun} {"\bbljun{}"} - -MACRO {jul} {"\bbljul{}"} - -MACRO {aug} {"\bblaug{}"} - -MACRO {sep} {"\bblsep{}"} - -MACRO {oct} {"\bbloct{}"} - -MACRO {nov} {"\bblnov{}"} - -MACRO {dec} {"\bbldec{}"} - -%</babel> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`eng.ord'} -% This function adds English endings for ordinals 1, 2, 3. However, if -% the second last digit is 1, then the ending is `th' for all last digits. -% So far, all other languages included do not have this problem, and it is -% sufficient to add the \textsl{th} equivalent. This might change with further -% languages. -% -% This function must be included with \texttt{babel} too, since that includes -% English. This means that the language definition files must also provide -% for |\bblst|, |\bblnd|, and |\bblrd|, setting them all equal to |\bblth|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*(english|!exlang)&!xedn> -FUNCTION {eng.ord} -{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ * - #-2 #1 substring$ "1" = - { bbl.th * } - { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "1" = - { pop$ bbl.st * } - { duplicate$ "2" = - { pop$ bbl.nd * } - { "3" = - { bbl.rd * } - { bbl.th * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -%</(english|!exlang)&!xedn> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!exlang> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!tail> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!head> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!jabr> -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} - -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} - -MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} - -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} - -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} - -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} - -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} - -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} - -MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} - -MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} - -MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} - -MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} - -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} - -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} - -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} - -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} - -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} - -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} - -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} - -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} -%</!jabr> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Journal abbreviations have been revised from the original Patashnik -% ones with help of Conrado Badenas and the IUA recommendations. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*jabr> -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} - -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} - -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} - -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} - -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} - -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."} - -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} - -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."} - -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} - -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} - -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} - -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."} - -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} - -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} - -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} - -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."} - -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"} - -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} - -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."} - -MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."} - -%</jabr> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.check'} -% Define functions that encapsulate the argument -% in a \TeX\ macro that allows for further processing when the -% bibliography is processed, or allows for a separate computer -% program to parse the |\bibitem| contents. -% -% The following table summarizes how each of the \btx{} entries -% is accessed for output; these are the points where -% the \texttt{format.bibinfo} or \texttt{bibinfo.check} functions -% are called. -% \subsubsection*{Trapped via \texttt{format.bibinfo}} -% \begin{description} -% \item[ \texttt{author} ]\texttt{format.names} -% \item[ \texttt{collaboration} ]\texttt{format.authors} -% \item[ \texttt{editor} ]\texttt{format.editors} (\texttt{book}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{format.names.ed} (\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}) -% \item[ \texttt{eid} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} (\texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, article) checks the output from \texttt{format.journal.pages} -% \item[ \texttt{isbn} ]\texttt{format.isbn} -% \item[ \texttt{issn} ]\texttt{format.issn} -% \item[ \texttt{journal} ]\texttt{format.article.crossref}, article -% \item[ \texttt{numpages} ]\texttt{format.journal.eid} -% \item[ \texttt{organization} ]\texttt{format.organization.address} (\texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}), \texttt{manual} -% \item[ \texttt{pages} ]\texttt{format.book}.pages (\texttt{book}, \texttt{booklet}), \texttt{format.pages} (\texttt{format.journal.pages}, \texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{article}, \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}) -% \item[ \texttt{publisher} ]\texttt{format.publisher.address} (like \texttt{output.check}, \texttt{inproceedings}, \texttt{proceedings}) -% \item[ \texttt{title} ]\texttt{format.title}, \texttt{format.btitle}, \texttt{misc}, \texttt{presort}, \texttt{bib.sort.order} -% \item[ \texttt{volume} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.book.crossref} -% \item[ \texttt{year} ]in optional argument of \texttt{\char`\\bibitem}, \texttt{format.date} (as part of date), \texttt{format.year}, \texttt{format.org.or.pub} -% \item[ \texttt{booktitle} ]\texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} (\texttt{incollection}, \texttt{inproceedings}), \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -% \item[ \texttt{howpublished} ]\texttt{booklet}, \texttt{misc} -% \item[ \texttt{edition} ]\texttt{convert.edition.format.edition} -% \item[ \texttt{institution} ]\texttt{techreport} -% \item[ \texttt{school} ]\texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis} -% \item[ \texttt{address} ]\texttt{format.org.or.pub}, \texttt{booklet}, \texttt{manual}, \texttt{mastersthesis}, \texttt{phdthesis}, \texttt{techreport} -% \item[ \texttt{chapter} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages} -% \item[ \texttt{number} ]\texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.vol.num.pages}, \texttt{format.tr.number} -% \item[ \texttt{series} ]\texttt{format.bvolume}, \texttt{format.number.series}, \texttt{format.book.crossref} -% \item[ \texttt{type} ]\texttt{format.chapter.pages}, \texttt{format.thesis.type}, \texttt{format.tr.number} -% \item[ \texttt{month} ]\texttt{format.date} -% \item[ \texttt{note} ]\texttt{format.note} -% \item[ \texttt{annote} ]\texttt{fin.entry} -% \end{description} -% -% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\url}} -% \begin{description} -% \item[ \texttt{url} ]\texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\harvardurl}, \texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.url} (\texttt{\char`\\url}), \texttt{format.note} (\texttt{\char`\\url}) -% \end{description} -% -% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\doi}} -% \begin{description} -% \item[ \texttt{doi} ]\texttt{format.doi} (\texttt{\char`\\doi}) -% \end{description} -% -% \subsubsection*{Encapsulated via \texttt{\char`\\eprint}} -% \begin{description} -% \item[ \texttt{eprint} ]\texttt{format.eprint} -% \item[ \texttt{archive} ]\texttt{format.eprint} -% \end{description} -% -% \subsubsection*{Not encapsulated:} -% \begin{description} -% \item[ \texttt{key} ]cite key -% \item[ \texttt{language} ]operand of \texttt{\char`\\selectlanguage} -% \end{description} -% -% \subsubsection*{\texttt{bibinfo} tag, but not a \btx{} field} -% \begin{description} -% \item[ \texttt{date} ]\texttt{format.date} -% \end{description} -% -% Provides robust access to fields, checking against \texttt{missing\$} -% and \texttt{empty\$}. A \dtx{} option allows giving -% a warning if either is the case. -% -% If not, it encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\bibinfo|. -% The encapsulation is enabled by the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option: -% if turned off, it simply pops the unneeded object. -% -% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field} -% -% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty} -% Side effect: warning. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {bibinfo.check} -{ swap$ - duplicate$ missing$ - { -%<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$ -%<!bibinfo.warning> pop$ pop$ - "" - } - { duplicate$ empty$ - { -%<bibinfo.warning> swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ -%<!bibinfo.warning> swap$ pop$ - } - { swap$ -%<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" * -%<!bibinfo> pop$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`bibinfo.warn'} -% Replaces \texttt{output.check} -% with \texttt{bibinfo.warn} followed by \texttt{output}. -% -% \texttt{field} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-field} -% -% \texttt{empty} \texttt{string} \texttt{->} \texttt{empty} -% -% Side effect: warning if the field is empty. -% Note: if the \dtx{} option \texttt{bibinfo} is not in effect, -% then no encapsulation is done. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn} -{ swap$ - duplicate$ missing$ - { - swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$ - "" - } - { duplicate$ empty$ - { - swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ - } - { swap$ -%<bibinfo> "\bibinfo{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}" * -%<!bibinfo> pop$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.eprint'} -% The access function for the \texttt{eprint} field. -% -% If the \texttt{bibinfo} \dtx{} option is selected, then this function -% encapsulates the argument in a \TeX\ macro |\eprint|. -% -% \texttt{->} \texttt{encapsulated-URL} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*eprint> -FUNCTION {format.eprint} -{ eprint duplicate$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { "\eprint" - archive empty$ - 'skip$ - { "[" * archive * "]" * } - if$ - "{" * swap$ * "}" * - } - if$ -} -%</eprint> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`write.url'} -% This function taken over from \texttt{agsm.sty}, the main \texttt{harvard} -% bib style. For non-Harvard styles that want to add the URL on a new line -% after the reference, use this function too, but defined slightly -% differently. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> -FUNCTION {write.url} -%<*!html> -{ -%<*url-doi&url> - doi empty$ - { url } - { "http://dx.doi.org/" doi * } - if$ -%</url-doi&url> -%<!url-doi|!url> url - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ } -%<harnm> { "\newline\harvardurl{" swap$ * "}" * write$ newline$ } -%<!harnm&url-nl> { "\newline\urlprefix\url{" swap$ * "}" * write$ newline$ } - if$ -} -%</!html> -%<*html> -{ -%<*url-doi&url> - doi empty$ - { url } - { "http://dx.doi.org/" doi * } - if$ -%</url-doi&url> -%<!url-doi|!url> url - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ } - { duplicate$ "<br><a href=" quote$ * swap$ * quote$ - * ">" * swap$ * "</a>" * write$ newline$ } - if$ -} -%</html> - -%</(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.url'} -% This function is reworked for \texttt{\filename} to provide a -% cleaner URL for DOIs. The definition of \cmd{\urldoi} is written in -% the \texttt{.bbl} file by the function \texttt{begin.bib}. When the -% package \pkg{hyperref} is loaded, the \meta{doi} is a hyperlink to -% \texttt{https://doi.org/\meta{doi}}. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata> -FUNCTION {format.url} -{ -%<url-doi&url> doi empty$ -%<url-doi&url> { - url - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } -%<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" swap$ * "}" * } -%<html> { -%<html> duplicate$ "<a href=" quote$ * swap$ * quote$ * -%<html> ">" * swap$ * "</a>" * -%<html> } - if$ -%<*url-doi&url> - } - { - doi -%<!html> "\doiprefix\urldoi{" swap$ * "}" * -%<html> duplicate$ "doi:<a href=" quote$ * "https://doi.org/" * -%<html> swap$ * quote$ * ">" * swap$ * "</a>" * - } - if$ -%</url-doi&url> -} - -%</(url-blk&!harnm)|revdata> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`check.speaker'} -% The \texttt{presentation} type uses the \texttt{key} entry to indicate which -% author is the speaker, as the sequence number in the author list. The speaker's -% name is put into a different font, depending on the extra option. If no font -% is specified, all names are the same. -% \begin{macrocode} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } - -%<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> -FUNCTION {check.speaker} -{ key empty$ 'skip$ - { key nameptr int.to.str$ = - { -%<pres-bf> bolden -%<pres-it&!pres-bf> emphasize -%<pres-sc&!pres-it&!pres-bf> scaps - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ -} - -%</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} - -% \begin{macro}{`format.names'} -% The \texttt{harvard} package now (version 2.0.3, for \LaTeXe) uses -% |\harvardand| in place of the word \textsl{and} so that it can be changed -% at run time. This is allowed for with the option \texttt{harnm}, which -% need not be used only with the \texttt{har} option. -% This seems like a useless feature for \texttt{.bst} files made from -% this multilanguage source. However, it is included anyway, which means -% if \texttt{harnm} option selected, one must redefine |\harvardand| -% in the document for the language being used. -% -% The location of the junior part for reversed name is not obvious. Prior -% to version 4.0, I always had it attached to the last name, as -% Smith, Jr, John, put it probably is better as Smith, John, Jr. For the -% AGU \texttt{nm-rev1} I always did it this way, probably because I had a -% good AGU example to follow. Dilemma: do I just change them all or add an -% option to do it? The option will maintain consistency with older -% versions, but this could also be considered a bug fix rather than a new -% feature. Solution: use the option, since I have found other \texttt{.bst} -% files from Beebe and Harvard that put junior between surname and first -% name. -% -% |bibinfo| is a variable used to store a string telling it whether the -% names being formatted are authors or editors, since this function is called -% for both purposes. Every call to this function must push the string onto the stack -% just before the call. -% \begin{macrocode} -STRINGS { bibinfo} - -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Stack note: if the names argument is a non-nil list, this function returns -% one object on the stack, the formatted list of names. -% -% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 'bibinfo := - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { - 's := - "" 't := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr -% \end{macrocode} -% Here is the author formatting when the names are not set in any special -% font, or when the entire name set in a single special font. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> -%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> -%<nm-init> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" -%<*!nm-init> -%<nm-rev&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" -%<nm-rev&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" -%<*!nm-rev> -%<nm-rv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{~}}" -%<nm-rv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{~}}{ jj}" -%<*!nm-rv> -%<nm-rvx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{}}" -%<nm-rvx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{}}{ jj}" -%<*!nm-rvx> -%<nm-rvcx&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{}}" -%<nm-rvcx&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{}}{, jj}" -%<*!nm-rvcx> -%<nm-rvv&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}{ f{.}.}" -%<nm-rvv&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{ f{.}.}{ jj}" -%<*!nm-rvv> -%<nm-rvvc&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f{.}.}" -%<nm-rvvc&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, f{.}.}{, jj}" -%<*!nm-rvvc> -%<nm-revf&!jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" -%<nm-revf&jnrlst> "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" -%<*!nm-revf> - "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" -%</!nm-revf> -%</!nm-rvvc> -%</!nm-rvv> -%</!nm-rvcx> -%</!nm-rvx> -%</!nm-rv> -%</!nm-rev> -%</!nm-init> -%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> -%<*nm-rev1> - duplicate$ #1 > - { "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" } -%<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" } -%<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, f.}{, jj}" } - if$ -%</nm-rev1> -%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> - duplicate$ #1 > - { "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" } -%<!jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, ff}" } -%<jnrlst> { "{vv~}{ll}{, ff}{, jj}" } - if$ -%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> - format.name$ -%<nm-rv|nm-rvx> remove.dots -%<nmft&nmand-rm> bib.name.font -%</!(nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> -% \end{macrocode} -% Here is the author formatting when the first and last names are -% set in (possibly different) special fonts. -% -% The junior part is optionally between the reversed names, or after them. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> -%<*!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> -%<*nm-init> - "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-init> -%<*!nm-init> -%<*nm-rev> - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font - s nameptr -%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}" -%<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}" - format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-rev> -%<*!nm-rev> -%<*nm-rv> - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font - s nameptr -%<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{~}}" -%<jnrlst> "{f{~}}{ jj}" - format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-rv> -%<*!nm-rv> -%<*nm-rvx> - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font - s nameptr -%<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{}}" -%<jnrlst> "{f{}}{ jj}" - format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-rvx> -%<*!nm-rvx> -%<*nm-rvcx> - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font - s nameptr -%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{}}" -%<jnrlst> "{f{}}{, jj}" - format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { remove.dots bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-rvcx> -%<*!nm-rvcx> -%<*nm-rvv> - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font - s nameptr -%<!jnrlst> "{jj }{f{.}.}" -%<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{ jj}" - format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-rvv> -%<*!nm-rvv> -%<*nm-rvvc> - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font - s nameptr -%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f{.}.}" -%<jnrlst> "{f{.}.}{, jj}" - format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-rvvc> -%<*!nm-rvvc> -%<*nm-revf> - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font - s nameptr -%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}" -%<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}" - format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-revf> -%<*!nm-revf> - "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ -%</!nm-revf> -%</!nm-rvvc> -%</!nm-rvv> -%</!nm-rvcx> -%</!nm-rvx> -%</!nm-rv> -%</!nm-rev> -%</!nm-init> -%</!nm-rev1&!nm-revv1> -%<*nm-rev1> - nameptr #1 > - { "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ - } - { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font - s nameptr -%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{f.}" -%<jnrlst> "{f.}{, jj}" - format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ - } - if$ -%</nm-rev1> -%<*!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> - nameptr #1 > - { "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ - } - { "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font - s nameptr -%<!jnrlst> "{jj, }{ff}" -%<jnrlst> "{ff}{, jj}" - format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ - } - if$ -%</!nm-rev1&nm-revv1> - * -%</nmft&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> - bibinfo bibinfo.check -%<*pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> - type$ "presentation" = - { check.speaker } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</pres-bf|pres-it|pres-sc> - 't := - nameptr #1 > - { -%<*nmlm> -%<m1> nameptr #1 -%<m2> nameptr #2 -%<m3> nameptr #3 -%<m4> nameptr #4 -%<m5> nameptr #5 -%<m6> nameptr #6 -%<m7> nameptr #7 -%<m8> nameptr #8 -%<m9> nameptr #9 -%<m0> nameptr #0 -%<m10> #10 + -%<m20> #20 + -%<m30> #30 + -%<m40> #40 + -%<m50> #50 + -%<m60> #60 + -%<m70> #70 + -%<m80> #80 + -%<m90> #90 + - #1 + = -%<x1> numnames #1 -%<x2> numnames #2 -%<x3> numnames #3 -%<x4> numnames #4 -%<x5> numnames #5 -%<x6> numnames #6 -%<x7> numnames #7 -%<x8> numnames #8 -%<x9> numnames #9 -%<x0> numnames #0 -%<x10> #10 + -%<x20> #20 + -%<x30> #30 + -%<x40> #40 + -%<x50> #50 + -%<x60> #60 + -%<x70> #70 + -%<x80> #80 + -%<x90> #90 + - > and - { "others" 't := - #1 'namesleft := } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</nmlm> - namesleft #1 > -%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * } -%<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * } -%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * } - { - s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = - { 't := } - { pop$ } - if$ -%<(and-com|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," * -%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" * -%<(and-com|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" * -%<*!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand> - numnames #2 > -%<etal-xc> t "others" = not and -%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * } -%<aunm-semi> { ";" * } -%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</!and-xcom&!and-com&!xand> - t "others" = - { -%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font -%<*!etal-it> -%<nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font * -%<!(nmft&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * -%</!etal-it> -%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * -%<nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font - } -%<*!xand> - { -%<*!harnm> -%<!amper> bbl.and -%<amper> "\&" -%</!harnm> -%<harnm> "\harvardand{}" -%<nmft&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font - space.word * t * - } -%</!xand> -%<xand> { " " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -%<*nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { bib.name.font } - if$ -%</nmft&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> - } if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.names.ed'} -% When editors are used in place of authors to identify the work, the -% names are always formatted just like authors'. However, in collections, -% where ``edited by'' or ``\emph{names} (editors)'' are given, it is -% normal not to reverse the names, even if the authors' are. The option -% \texttt{ed-rev} sees to it that editor names are always formatted exactly -% like those of authors, being reversed if necessary. -% -% The option \texttt{ed-au} is identical to \texttt{ed-rev}, but is more -% logical. It means editors (in incollections) are formatted exactly like -% authors, with all the font, reversing, and number limitations. This is -% selected automatically with \texttt{nm-init} and \texttt{nm-} default to save -% programming memory. -% -% The option \texttt{nm-revf} in this case acts the same as the default -% when no \texttt{nm-} option given: full names with surname last. Therefore -% it is not necessary to test for it at all, since it, like the default, -% has the lowest priority: any other \texttt{nm-} option clobbers it. -% -% The options \texttt{aunm-semi} and \texttt{aunm-sl} will put a semi-colon or -% slash between editor names, just as for authors, when \texttt{ed-rev} not -% selected, in keeping with the idea that in this case both authors and editors -% are to be formatted the same. -% -% This function either dispatches to \texttt{format.names} or executes code -% which is similar. In the latter case, names are always presented first -% followed by surname (``last name''); name limit processing (\texttt{nmlm}) is not executed; -% and endgame processing differs in being qualified by \texttt{nmfted}. -% -% Stack note: if the names (second) argument is a non-nil list, this function returns -% with one object on the stack, the formatted list of names. -% -% \texttt{names`string} \texttt{bibinfo`string} \texttt{->} \texttt{author-list`string} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.names.ed} -{ -%<ed-rev|ed-au> format.names -%<*!ed-rev&!ed-au> - 'bibinfo := - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { - 's := - "" 't := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr -% \end{macrocode} -% Editor name is handled as a single object, with no separation of first and last name. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> -%<nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" -%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> -%<nm-revv1> "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" -%<*!nm-revv1> -%<nm-rv> "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" -%<*!nm-rv> -%<nm-rvx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" -%<*!nm-rvx> -%<nm-rvcx> "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" -%<*!nm-rvcx> -%<nm-rvv|nm-rvvc> "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" -%<*!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> - "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" -%</!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> -%</!nm-rvcx> -%</!nm-rvx> -%</!nm-rv> -%</!nm-revv1> -%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> - format.name$ -%<nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> remove.dots -%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font -%</!(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> -% \end{macrocode} -% Editor first and last name handled separately. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> -%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> - "{f.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1> -%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> -%<*nm-revv1> - "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-revv1> -%<*!nm-revv1> -%<*nm-rv> - "{f{~}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-rv> -%<*!nm-rv> -%<*nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> - "{f{}}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { remove.dots bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> -%<*!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> -%<*nm-rvv|nm-rvvc> - "{f{.}.}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * } - if$ -%</nm-rvv|nm-rvvc> -%<*!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> - "{ff}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * } - if$ - s nameptr - "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font * - s nameptr - "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * } - if$ -%</!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> -%</!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> -%</!nm-rv> -%</!nm-revv1> -%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1> - * -%</(nmft&nmfted&(fnm-rm|fnm-def))> - bibinfo bibinfo.check - 't := - nameptr #1 > - { - namesleft #1 > -%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { ", " * t * } -%<aunm-semi> { "; " * t * } -%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/ " * t * } - { - s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = - { 't := } - { pop$ } - if$ -%<(and-com-ed|xand)&!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> "," * -%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-semi> ";" * -%<(and-com-ed|xand)&aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> "/" * -%<*!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand> - numnames #2 > -%<etal-xc> t "others" = not and -%<!aunm-semi&!aunm-sl> { "," * } -%<aunm-semi> { ";" * } -%<aunm-sl&!aunm-semi> { "/" * } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</!and-xcom&!and-com-ed&!xand> - t "others" = - { - -%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font -%<*!etal-it> -%<nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def))&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal bib.name.font * -%<!(nmft&nmfted&(nmand-rm|(fnm-rm|fnm-def)))|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * -%</!etal-it> -%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * -%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font - } -%<*!xand> - { -%<*!harnm> -%<!amper> bbl.and -%<amper> "\&" -%</!harnm> -%<harnm> "\harvardand{}" -%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> bib.name.font - space.word * t * - } -%</!xand> -%<xand> { " " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { bib.name.font } - if$ -%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(fnm-rm|fnm-def)> - } if$ -%</!ed-rev&!ed-au> -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.key'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay> -FUNCTION {format.key} -{ empty$ - { key field.or.null } - { "" } - if$ -} - -%</ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.authors'} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author "author" format.names -%<*revdata> - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { " (" swap$ * ")" * } - if$ - * - } - if$ -%</revdata> -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`get.bbl.editor'} -% Use this function universally when accessing the ``editor'' text entity. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor} -{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$ } - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.editors'} -% The option \texttt{edpar} puts the word `editor' in parentheses. -% In \texttt{genbst.mbs}, this occurred automatically with the option -% \texttt{ed}, to abbreviate `editor' to `ed'. In \texttt{babel.mbs}, -% this was not the case, because of complications with the word functions. -% Now this possibility is added as a special option, which means there is -% some inconsistency with older \texttt{.dbj} files that called \texttt{ed}: -% the abbreviated `ed' is not put in parentheses unless \texttt{edpar} is -% also called. -% -% Note that the code here is very similar to code in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}; -% the two should be kept coordinated. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { -%<!edpar&!edparxc> "," * - " " * - get.bbl.editor -%<bkedcap> capitalize -%<edpar|edparc|edparxc> "(" swap$ * ")" * - * - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.in.editors'} -% See the note about the option \texttt{edpar} above. -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.book.pages'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*pg-bk> -FUNCTION {format.book.pages} -{ pages "pages" bibinfo.check - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { " " * bbl.pages * } - if$ -} -%</pg-bk> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.isbn'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*isbn> -FUNCTION {format.isbn} -{ isbn "isbn" bibinfo.check - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - "ISBN " swap$ * - } - if$ -} - -%</isbn> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.issn'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*issn> -FUNCTION {format.issn} -{ issn "issn" bibinfo.check - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - "ISSN " swap$ * - } - if$ -} - -%</issn> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.doi'} -% DOIs like URLs are encapsulated by their own commands, so need no \texttt{bibinfo.check}. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*doi|(url-doi&!url)> -FUNCTION {format.doi} -{ doi empty$ - { "" } - { -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<!html> "\doi{" doi * "}" * -%<html> "doi:" doi * - } - if$ -} -%</doi|(url-doi&!url)> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`select.language'} -% The \texttt{language} field code has been provided by Bernd Feige, of the -% University of Freiburg. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*lang> -FUNCTION {select.language} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - { language empty$ - 'skip$ - { "{\selectlanguage{" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -%</lang> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.note'} -% Notes should be entered as though they were a sentence on their own. -% However, if they appear mid-sentence rather than after a block or sentence, -% the first letter must be lowercase. Thus if a note begins with a proper -% noun, it must be in braces. To avoid a warning about unmatched braces -% with the \texttt{change.case\$} function, check first if the leading -% character is an opening brace. -% -% With options \texttt{url,url-nt}, the URL text is treated as a note, and -% added here. It is output directly, not prepended to the note text. This -% means, if the note is to be a new sentence, the URL text starts that -% sentence, and the regular note is added to that sentence, comma between. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.note} -{ -%<*url-nt&!revdata> - url empty$ - 'skip$ -%<!html> { "\urlprefix\url{" url * "}" * output } -%<html> { "<a href=" quote$ * url * quote$ -%<html> * ">" * url * "</a>" * output } - if$ -%</url-nt&!revdata> - note empty$ - { "" } - { note #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "{" = - 'skip$ - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "l" } - { "u" } - if$ - change.case$ - } - if$ - note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check - } - if$ -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.title'} -% For a quoted title, any punctuation in the title goes inside the quote. -% Otherwise, the comma or period following the title also goes inside. -% Exception is with \texttt{qx} option, in which case the comma goes -% outside, even when punctuation present; for period (\texttt{!blk-com}) -% is added outside only when punctuation is absent. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title -%<*!atit-u> - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "t" change.case$ } - if$ -%</!atit-u> - "title" bibinfo.check -%<*tit-it|tit-qq|lang> - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { -%<tit-it> emphasize -%<*!tit-it&tit-qq> - "\enquote{" swap$ * -%<*!qx> -%<*blk-com> - non.stop -%<!com-semi&!com-blank> { ",} " * } -%<com-semi> { ";} " * } -%<!com-semi&com-blank> { "} " * } - { "} " * } - if$ -%</blk-com> -%<!blk-com> add.period$ "}" * -%</!qx> -%<*qx> -%<*blk-com> -%<!com-semi&!com-blank> "}, " * -%<com-semi> "}; " * -%<!com-semi&com-blank> "} " * -%</blk-com> -%<!blk-com> "}" * -%</qx> -%</!tit-it&tit-qq> -%<lang> select.language - } - if$ -%</tit-it|tit-qq|lang> -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.title'} -% For a quoted title, the punctuation appears in the quotes. For commas -% between block, this means the inter-block punctuation is already present, -% so it must be suppressed after every \texttt{format.title output}. This -% is done by setting the \texttt{output.state} to \texttt{before.all}, but -% only if there really was a title. Call this macro every time after -% titles are output. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*blk-com&tit-qq> -FUNCTION {end.quote.title} -{ title empty$ - 'skip$ - { before.all 'output.state := } - if$ -} -%</blk-com&tit-qq> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`end.quote.btitle'} -% Similar to |end.quote.title| except that it is only applied if titles of -% proceedings and collections are quoted, and if -% neither \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, nor \texttt{edby-par} are selected -% (this is the default case in the relevant menu of the \texttt{makebst.tex} run). -% These options add text after the booktitle, -% so additional punctuation need not be suppressed. Unless there is no editor! -% -% Note: this function is called after the result of \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle} -% has been output, and attempts to predict what that output had been. -% Would it not be better to call this function while that result is still -% on the stack? -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bt-qq> -FUNCTION {end.quote.btitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - 'skip$ -%<!edby&!edby-par&!edby-parc> { before.all 'output.state := } -%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc> - { editor empty$ - { before.all 'output.state := } - 'skip$ - if$ - } -%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc> - if$ -} -%</bt-qq> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`make.full.names'} -% In versions before 2.2, there were two functions \texttt{calc.long.label} -% and \texttt{format.long.lab.names} that made up the string -% \texttt{long.label} for each entry. This contains the full author list. -% However, there was a bug in the one routine, entered by mistake when an -% earlier bug was removed, and more seriously, the string -% \texttt{long.label} was limited to \texttt{entry.max\$} characters, 100 on -% my system. Author lists were truncated. Thus, \texttt{make.full.names} -% is used instead to enter the full list of names directly in the -% \texttt{output.bibitem} function, without an intermediate string. This -% involves changing the order of some function definitions, especially -% \texttt{output.bibitem} must come later. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*har|cay|nat> -FUNCTION {format.full.names} -{'s := - "" 't := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr -%<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ -%<*jnrlab> -%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ -%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ -%</jnrlab> -%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font - 't := - nameptr #1 > - { -%<*nmlm> -%<m1> nameptr #1 -%<m2> nameptr #2 -%<m3> nameptr #3 -%<m4> nameptr #4 -%<m5> nameptr #5 -%<m6> nameptr #6 -%<m7> nameptr #7 -%<m8> nameptr #8 -%<m9> nameptr #9 -%<m0> nameptr #0 -%<m10> #10 + -%<m20> #20 + -%<m30> #30 + -%<m40> #40 + -%<m50> #50 + -%<m60> #60 + -%<m70> #70 + -%<m80> #80 + -%<m90> #90 + - #1 + = -%<x1> numnames #1 -%<x2> numnames #2 -%<x3> numnames #3 -%<x4> numnames #4 -%<x5> numnames #5 -%<x6> numnames #6 -%<x7> numnames #7 -%<x8> numnames #8 -%<x9> numnames #9 -%<x0> numnames #0 -%<x10> #10 + -%<x20> #20 + -%<x30> #30 + -%<x40> #40 + -%<x50> #50 + -%<x60> #60 + -%<x70> #70 + -%<x80> #80 + -%<x90> #90 + - > and - { "others" 't := - #1 'namesleft := } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</nmlm> - namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { - s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = - { 't := } - { pop$ } - if$ - t "others" = - { -%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font -%<*!etal-it> -%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * -%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * -%</!etal-it> -%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * -%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font - } - { -%<*!harnm> -%<*!and-xcom> - numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</!and-xcom> -%<!amper> bbl.and -%<amper> "\&" -%</!harnm> -%<harnm> "\harvardand{}" - space.word * t * - } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -%<*lab&!and-rm> - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { cite.name.font } - if$ -%</lab&!and-rm> -} - -FUNCTION {author.editor.key.full} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key - if$ - } - { editor format.full.names } - if$ - } - { author format.full.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.key.full} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key - if$ - } - { author format.full.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {editor.key.full} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key - if$ - } - { editor format.full.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {make.full.names} -{ type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.key.full - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.key.full - 'author.key.full - if$ - } - if$ -} - -%</har|cay|nat> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`output.bibitem'} -% A user has pointed out to me that if the label argument in square brackets -% are put into braces (within the squares) it is then resistent to any -% problems if square braces should appear within the label. Do this, but -% only for the \texttt{nat} option. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ -%<*!html> -%<*ay> -%<!har&!nat> "\bibitem[" write$ -%<!har&nat> "\bibitem[{" write$ -%<har> "\harvarditem" write$ -%<nmd> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" write$ -%<ast> "\protect\astroncite{" write$ -%<cay> "\protect\citeauthoryear{" make.full.names * "}{" * write$ -%<cn> "\protect\citename{" write$ -%<!har> label write$ -%<har> make.full.names duplicate$ label = -%<har> 'skip$ -%<har> { "[" label * "]" * write$ } -%<har> if$ -%<har> "{" swap$ * "}{" * write$ -%<har> year duplicate$ empty$ -%<cn> ", }" year duplicate$ empty$ -%<cay|nmd|ast> "}{" year duplicate$ empty$ -%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&blkyear> { pop$ "" } -%<(har|cn|cay|nmd|ast)&!blkyear> { pop$ "????" } -%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> 'skip$ -%<har|cn|cay|nmd|ast> if$ -%<har> extra.label * "}{" * write$ -%<cn> * extra.label * "]{" * write$ -%<cay|nmd|ast> * extra.label * "}]{" * write$ -%<alk> "]{" write$ -%<!(har|cay|nmd|ast|alk|cn|nat)> ")]{" write$ -%<nat> ")" make.full.names duplicate$ short.list = -%<nat> { pop$ } -%<nat> { * } -%<nat> if$ -%<nat> "}]{" * write$ -%</ay> -%<!ay&!(cite|alph)> "\bibitem{" write$ -%<!ay&(cite|alph)> "\bibitem[" label * "]{" * write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" -%</!html> -%<*html> -%<*htdes> - "<dt><strong><tt>" write$ - cite$ write$ - "</tt></strong></dt>" write$ newline$ - "<dd>" -%</htdes> -%<htlist&!htdes> "<li>" -%<!htlist&!htdes> "<p>" -%</html> - before.all 'output.state := -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`if.digit'} -% Add \texttt{if.digit} and \texttt{n.separate} to convert large page numbers -% to a separated number. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> -FUNCTION {if.digit} -{ duplicate$ "0" = - swap$ duplicate$ "1" = - swap$ duplicate$ "2" = - swap$ duplicate$ "3" = - swap$ duplicate$ "4" = - swap$ duplicate$ "5" = - swap$ duplicate$ "6" = - swap$ duplicate$ "7" = - swap$ duplicate$ "8" = - swap$ "9" = or or or or or or or or or -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`n.separate'} -% \texttt{pgsep-s}, \texttt{pgsep-p} -% Large page numbers are to be separated in threes, with thin space, comma -% or period. The number must be 5 digits before the separation occurs. -% No provision is made for numbers of 7 or more digits. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {n.separate} -{ 't := - "" - #0 'numnames := - { t empty$ not } - { t #-1 #1 substring$ if.digit - { numnames #1 + 'numnames := } - { #0 'numnames := } - if$ - t #-1 #1 substring$ swap$ * - t #-2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - numnames #5 = - { duplicate$ #1 #2 substring$ swap$ - #3 global.max$ substring$ -%<pgsep-c> "," swap$ * * -%<pgsep-p> "." swap$ * * -%<pgsep-s&!html> "\," swap$ * * -%<pgsep-s&html> " " swap$ * * - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - while$ -} -%</pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`n.dashify'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ -%<pgsep-c|pgsep-s|pgsep-p> n.separate - 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`word.in'} -% The function \texttt{word.in} prints the word \textsl{in} for references -% that are -% contained in a larger work, or in conference proceedings. One may have a -% colon after the word with the option \texttt{in-col}. If blocks of text are -% to be separated with commas (option \texttt{blk-com}) then the word remains -% in lower case, as it is defined in \texttt{bbl.in}; but if blocks act as -% sentences, then it must be capitalized. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {word.in} -%<in-x>{ "" } -%<*!in-x> -%<blk-com|blk-tita>{ bbl.in -%<!blk-com&!blk-tita>{ bbl.in capitalize -%<in-col> ":" * -%<in-it> emphasize - " " * } -%</!in-x> - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.date'} -% The new \texttt{harvard.sty} allows variable brackets around the date -% in the reference list. It uses |\harvardyearleft| and |\harvardyearright| -% in the \texttt{.bst} files. Allow this with the option \texttt{harnm}, -% which could actually be used without the \texttt{har} option. Note that -% this overrides the other year formatting options, except for the preceding punctuation. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay> -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ - { -%<*!blkyear> - "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$ - pop$ "????" -%</!blkyear> - } - 'skip$ - if$ -%<*aymth> - month "month" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { -%<dtrev> swap$ - " " * swap$ - } - if$ - * -%<mth-bare> remove.dots -%</aymth> -%<dtbf> bolden - extra.label * -%<*!harnm> -%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per> - before.all 'output.state := -%<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" * -%<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" * -%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ * -%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ * -%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state := -%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ * -%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-blk|yr-com|yr-per> -%</!harnm> -%<*harnm> - before.all 'output.state := - " \harvardyearleft " swap$ * "\harvardyearright{}" * -%<yr-col> ":" swap$ * -%<!yr-col&yr-com> "," swap$ * -%<!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state := -%<!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ * -%</harnm> -} -%</ay> -%<*!ay> -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ -%<!xmth> month "month" bibinfo.check -%<xmth> "" - duplicate$ empty$ - year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ - { swap$ 'skip$ - { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ } - if$ - * - } - { swap$ 'skip$ - { -%<showstack> month year -%<!dtrev> swap$ - " " * swap$ - } - if$ - * -%<mth-bare> remove.dots - } - if$ -%<dtbf> bolden -%<*yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk> - duplicate$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { - before.all 'output.state := -%<yr-par> " (" swap$ * ")" * -%<!yr-par&yr-brk> " [" swap$ * "]" * -%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&yr-col> ": " swap$ * -%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&yr-com> ", " swap$ * -%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&yr-per> after.sentence 'output.state := -%<!yr-par&!yr-brk&!yr-col&!yr-com&!yr-per&yr-blk> " " swap$ * - } - if$ -%</yr-par|yr-brk|yr-col|yr-com|yr-per|yr-blk> -} -%</!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.year'} -% For the options that put the year into the journal specifications, use a -% special formatter separate from the regular date formatter. -% The year is always in parentheses (except for appended to journal name). -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs> -FUNCTION{format.year} -{ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ - { "empty year in " cite$ * -%<ay&!blkyear> "; set to ????" * - warning$ -%<ay&!blkyear> pop$ "????" - } - { -%<!ay&jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" * -%<!ay&!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" * - } - if$ -%<*ay> - extra.label * -%<jdt-vs> " (" swap$ * ")" * -%<!jdt-vs> "(" swap$ * ")" * -%</ay> -} -%</jdt-p|jdt-pc|jdt-v|jdt-vs> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.btitle'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title "title" bibinfo.check - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { -%<!btit-rm> emphasize -%<lang> select.language - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`either.or.check'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.bvolume'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { bbl.volume volume tie.or.space.prefix - "volume" bibinfo.check * * - series "series" bibinfo.check - duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ -%<*!ser-vol> - { swap$ bbl.of space.word * swap$ - emphasize * } -%</!ser-vol> -%<ser-vol> { emphasize ", " * swap$ * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.number.series'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } -%<*num-xser> - { series empty$ - { number "number" bibinfo.check } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { bbl.number } - { bbl.number capitalize } - if$ - number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * * - bbl.in space.word * - series "series" bibinfo.check * - } - if$ - } -%</num-xser> -%<*!num-xser> - { output.state mid.sentence = - { bbl.number } - { bbl.number capitalize } - if$ - number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * * - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { bbl.in space.word * - series "series" bibinfo.check * - } - if$ - } -%</!num-xser> - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`is.num'} -% This function takes the single-character string on the stack and returns -% 1 if it is a digit, else 0. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!xedn> -FUNCTION {is.num} -{ chr.to.int$ - duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not - swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`extract.num'} -% This function tests the string on the stack to see if it begins with a -% number. If so, that number is left on the stack; if the string contains -% no numbers at the start, it is left unchanged. The idea is to convert -% \textsl{1st} to \textsl{1} and leave \textsl{first} as is. -% This is used by \code{convert.edition}. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {extract.num} -{ duplicate$ 't := - "" 's := - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - duplicate$ is.num - { s swap$ * 's := } - { pop$ "" 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - s empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ s } - if$ -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`convert.edition'} -% The function \texttt{convert.edition} takes the text in the field -% \texttt{edition} and changes it to the language-specific equivalent. As -% originally planned for \btx, this field should contain the words -% \textsl{First}, \textsl{Second}, etc. Being so explicit, -% it is not so easy to translate, nor to -% convert to \textsl{1st}, \textsl{2nd}, etc., if one wanted. -% This function carries out the translation, by changing -% \textsl{first} or \textsl{1} to \texttt{bbl.first}, and so -% on. The field is reduced to lower case to make it case insensitive. If no -% translation is found, then the original text in \texttt{edition} is used -% instead, as it stands. However, if the original is a number greater than -% the maximum for which text is provided, then \texttt{bbl.th} is added to -% it. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {convert.edition} -{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's := - s "first" = s "1" = or - { bbl.first 't := } - { s "second" = s "2" = or - { bbl.second 't := } - { s "third" = s "3" = or - { bbl.third 't := } - { s "fourth" = s "4" = or - { bbl.fourth 't := } - { s "fifth" = s "5" = or - { bbl.fifth 't := } - { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num -%<!english&exlang> { s bbl.th * 't := } -%<english|!exlang> { s eng.ord 't := } - { edition 't := } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - t -} -%</!xedn> - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.edition'} -% This function formats the text for the edition specification, such as -% ``Second edition''. It combines the edition number with the word -% \textsl{edition}. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { -%<!xedn> convert.edition - output.state mid.sentence = - { "l" } - { "t" } - if$ change.case$ - "edition" bibinfo.check - " " * bbl.edition * - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -INTEGERS { multiresult } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`multi.page.check'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.pages'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { duplicate$ multi.page.check - { -%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.pages swap$ - n.dashify - } - { -%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> bbl.page swap$ - } - if$ -%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> tie.or.space.prefix - "pages" bibinfo.check -%<!bkpg-x&!ppx> * * -%<bkpg-par> "(" swap$ * ")" * - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`first.page'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*jpg-1> -FUNCTION {first.page} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ -} - -%</jpg-1> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.pages'} -% Note: this function gets called with something on the stack. -% It may be the volume and number. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.journal.pages} -{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ - { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ pop$ format.pages } - { -%<volp-sp> ": " * -%<*!volp-sp> -%<volp-blk> " " * -%<*!volp-blk> -%<volp-com> ", " * -%<*!volp-com> -%<volp-semi> "; " * -%<!volp-semi> ":" * -%</!volp-com> -%</!volp-blk> -%</!volp-sp> -%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&jdt-p> format.year * " " * -%<!jdt-v&!jdt-vs&!jdt-p&jdt-pc> format.year * ", " * - swap$ -%<jpg-1> first.page -%<!jpg-1> n.dashify -%<*jwdpg> - pages multi.page.check - 'bbl.pages - 'bbl.page - if$ - swap$ tie.or.space.prefix -%</jwdpg> - "pages" bibinfo.check -%<jwdpg> * * - * - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.journal.eid'} -% -% This function is called with something on the stack (journal vol, number) -% and appends \texttt{eid} and \texttt{numpages} if those field are non-empty. -% Very similar to \texttt{format.journal.pages}. -% -% For the AGU style of including the DOI as part of the EID, the DOI number -% is appended too. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.journal.eid} -{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check - duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ - { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { -%<volp-sp> ": " * -%<*!volp-sp> -%<volp-blk> " " * -%<*!volp-blk> -%<volp-com> ", " * -%<*!volp-com> -%<volp-semi> "; " * -%<!volp-semi> ":" * -%</!volp-com> -%</!volp-blk> -%</!volp-sp> - } - if$ - swap$ * -%<*revdata> - numpages empty$ 'skip$ - { bbl.eidpp numpages tie.or.space.prefix - "numpages" bibinfo.check * * - " (" swap$ * ")" * * - } - if$ -%</revdata> - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.vol.num.pages'} -% Version 3.84, I have rationalized several options that placed the date in the -% journal specifications. It was rather chaotic before, but now it should be -% more systematic. This means some options have been removed, something that I -% do not like to do. -% -% The option \texttt{pp-last} suppresses the pages in the formatting macros, and -% sees to it that the pages are added just before any notes in those entries -% that take pages. This applies to more than just \texttt{article}, but to -% \texttt{inbook}, \texttt{incollection} as well. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null - duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { -%<jwdvol> bbl.volume swap$ tie.or.space.prefix - "volume" bibinfo.check -%<jwdvol> * * - } - if$ -%<vol-bf&!vol-2bf> bolden -%<!vol-bf&!vol-2bf&vol-it> emphasize -%<jdt-v|jdt-vs> format.year * -%<*!vnum-x> - number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { - swap$ duplicate$ empty$ - { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ - swap$ -%<vnum-sp> "~(" swap$ * ")" * -%<!vnum-sp&vnum-cm> ", " swap$ * -%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&vnum-nr> ", " bbl.nr * number tie.or.space.prefix pop$ * swap$ * -%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&vnum-h> ", \#" swap$ * -%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&vnum-b> " " swap$ * -%<!vnum-sp&!vnum-cm&!vnum-nr&!vnum-h&!vnum-b> "(" swap$ * ")" * - } - if$ * -%<!vol-bf&vol-2bf> bolden -%</!vnum-x> -%<*!pp-last> - eid empty$ - { format.journal.pages } - { format.journal.eid } - if$ -%</!pp-last> -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.chapter.pages'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ -%<!pp-last> 'format.pages -%<pp-last> { "" } - { type empty$ - { bbl.chapter } - { type "l" change.case$ - "type" bibinfo.check - } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.prefix - "chapter" bibinfo.check - * * -%<*!pp-last> - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ -%</!pp-last> - } - if$ -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`bt.enquote'} -% This is to place the booktitle for proceedings and collections into quotes. -% If punctuation is to be included, then add a comma unless a stop already -% exists, or add a period under the only circumstances that -% |format.in.ed.booktitle| is followed by |new.sentence|. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bt-qq> -FUNCTION {bt.enquote} -{ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "\enquote{" swap$ * -%<*!qx> - non.stop - { ",} " * } - { "}, " * } - if$ -%</!qx> -%<*qx> - "}, " * -%</qx> - } - if$ -} -%</bt-qq> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.booktitle'} -% The function \texttt{format.booktitle} pushes one object -% (the book title, suitably encapsulated) onto the stack. -% It is currently used in \texttt{format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -% and in \texttt{format.in.ed.booktitle}, and should be used whenever accessing -% the \texttt{booktitle} field for eventual output. -% -% If the book title is empty or missing, the function pushes an empty string. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.booktitle} -{ - booktitle "booktitle" bibinfo.check -%<!bt-qq&!bt-rm> emphasize -%<bt-qq> bt.enquote -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.in.ed.booktitle'} -% Prior to version 3.81, the \textsl{Editor} or \textsl{Edited by} in -% parentheses was meant to be capitalized, but this did not work properly. -% Now the option \texttt{edcap} produces this, and default is not capitalized. -% -% Notes on \dtx{} options: -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% The following combinations are available through the \texttt{makebst.tex} interface: -% \begin{quote} -% \verb+(+ \\ -% \verb+ <default>+ \\ -% \verb+ |edby ( |edbyx |edbyy|edbyw[edcap])+ \\ -% \verb+ |edby-par (|edcap|edbyx[edcap]|edbyy )+ \\ -% \verb+ |edby-parc(|edcap|edbyx )+ \\ -% \verb+)+ -% \end{quote} -% \item -% \texttt{edby}, \texttt{edby-par}, and \texttt{edby-parc} are mutually exclusive -% and, except for the default, exhaustive. -% \item -% \texttt{edbyx}, \texttt{edbyw}, and \texttt{edbyy} are mutually exclusive -% and, except for the default, exhaustive. -% \item -% \texttt{edcap} is independent of the above two groups of options. -% \item -% When parentheses need to be applied, we make sure that the respective -% \dtx{} guard expressions are mutually exclusive. -% It makes no sense for \texttt{edbyw} to be in effect if either of -% \texttt{edby-par} or \texttt{edby-parc} is in effect. -% \item -% \texttt{makebst.tex} only activates \texttt{edcap} in certain cases, -% but we do no checking here, applying it consistently to the -% ``editor'' text entity. -% \item -% The code between \texttt{<!edpar>} and \verb+<edpar\|edparc>+ -% \emph{must} match the corresponding code in \texttt{format.editors}. -% This means that in the default case, formatting is controlled by -% a \dtx{} mechanism entirely different from the other cases. -% \item \texttt{ser-ed} has been added to suit AGU. Result of series plus -% volume to go between booktitle and editors; must remove \texttt{format.bvolume} -% from \texttt{incollection} and \texttt{inproceedings}. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { -%<showstack>% btitle -%<*ser-ed> - format.bvolume duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ - { ", " swap$ * * } - if$ -%</ser-ed> - editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ - { -%<*!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)> -%<showstack>% btitle ednms -%<!edpar&!edparxc> "," * - " " * - get.bbl.editor -%<bkedcap> capitalize -%<edpar> "(" swap$ * "), " * -%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)> "(" swap$ * ") " * -%<!edpar&!(edparc|edparxc)> ", " * - * swap$ -%<showstack>% eds btitle -%</!(edby|edby-par|edby-parc)> -%<*edby|edby-par|edby-parc> -%<showstack>% btitle ednms -%<edbyx|edbyy|edbyw> get.bbl.editor -%<!(edbyx|edbyy|edbyw)> bbl.edby -%<edcap> capitalize -%<!(edby-par|edby-parc)&edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" * -%<showstack>% btitle ednms ed -%<(edby-par|edby)&edbyy> swap$ "," * - " " * swap$ * -%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed -%<(edby-par|edby-parc)&!edbyw> "(" swap$ * ")" * - swap$ -%<edby|edby-parc> "," * - " " * swap$ -%</edby|edby-par|edby-parc> -%<showstack>% btitle ednms-ed (or ednms-ed btitle) - * } - if$ -%<showstack>% btitle-ednms-ed (or ednms-ed-btitle) (or btitle) - word.in swap$ * - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`empty.misc.check'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay> -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and -%<!seq-no|alph> key empty$ not and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -%</!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.thesis.type'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - { swap$ pop$ - "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.tr.number'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ number "number" bibinfo.check - type duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ bbl.techrep } - 'skip$ - if$ - "type" bibinfo.check - swap$ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "t" change.case$ } - { tie.or.space.prefix * * } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.article.crossref'} -% The \texttt{journal} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be -% done by command. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ -%<*!ay> - key duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ - journal duplicate$ empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * warning$ } - { "journal" bibinfo.check emphasize word.in swap$ * } - if$ - } - { word.in swap$ * " " *} - if$ -%</!ay> -%<ay> word.in -%<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -%<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" * -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.crossref.editor'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay> -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ -%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font - "editor" bibinfo.check - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ -%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font - "editor" bibinfo.check - " " * bbl.etal -%<etal-it> emphasize - * -%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font -%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't := - } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { -%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font - "editor" bibinfo.check - " " * bbl.etal -%<etal-it> emphasize - * -%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> bib.name.font -%<nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> "others" 't := - } - { -%<*!harnm> -%<!amper> bbl.and space.word -%<amper> " \& " -%</!harnm> -%<harnm> " \harvardand\ " - * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ -%<nmft&nmfted&nmand-rm> bib.name.font - "editor" bibinfo.check - * - } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -%<*nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm> - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { bib.name.font "editor" bibinfo.check } - if$ -%</nmft&nmfted&!nmand-rm> -} -%</!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.book.crossref'} -% The \texttt{series} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be -% done by command. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume duplicate$ empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - pop$ word.in - } - { bbl.volume -%<!(blk-com|blk-tita)> capitalize - swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word * - } - if$ -%<*!ay> - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { series emphasize * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ -%</!ay> -%<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -%<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" * -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.incoll.inproc.crossref'} -% The \texttt{booktitle} field was emphasized emplicitly, but it should be -% done by command. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ -%<*!ay> - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - } - { word.in swap$ * } - if$ - } - { word.in key * " " *} - if$ - } - { word.in format.crossref.editor * " " *} - if$ -%</!ay> -%<ay> word.in -%<!html> " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -%<html> " <tt>" * crossref * "</tt>" * -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.org.or.pub'} -% Psychology journals often want \textit{address}: \textit{publisher}. -% -% \textsl{Nature} wants publisher and date in parentheses, and when both -% are there, they are merged into one set. -% -% Call function \texttt{add.blank} before parentheses so suppress preceding -% punctuation, which looks strange when publisher in parentheses. -% -% MPG Jahrbuch wants publisher and year, but without parentheses. Add -% \texttt{pub-nopar} to be used with \texttt{pub-date}. -% -% Have now (3.87.h) extended this function to include the organization, if -% present. This is for \texttt{inproceedings} and \texttt{proceedings} where -% the publisher is optional, and organization too. If the publisher is missing, -% but the organization present, it is formatted like the publisher. This -% complication comes from styles that want the publisher/organization to have -% the date included, all in parentheses. -% -% This function is called by \texttt{format.publisher.address} and -% \texttt{format.organization.address}, each putting the appropriate text -% into the stack first. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub} -{ 't := - "" -%<*pub-date&!ay> - year empty$ - { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</pub-date&!ay> -%<*!(pub-date&ay)> - address empty$ t empty$ and -%<pub-date> year empty$ and - 'skip$ - { -%</!(pub-date&ay)> -%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> add.blank "(" * -%<*add-pub> - address "address" bibinfo.check * - t empty$ - 'skip$ -%</add-pub> -%<*!add-pub> - t empty$ - { address "address" bibinfo.check * - } - { t * - address empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * address "address" bibinfo.check * } - if$ - } -%</!add-pub> -%<*add-pub> - { address empty$ - 'skip$ - { ": " * } - if$ - t * - } -%</add-pub> - if$ -%<*pub-date&!ay> - year empty$ - 'skip$ - { t empty$ address empty$ and - 'skip$ -%<!pub-xc> { ", " swap$ * * } -%<pub-xc> { " " swap$ * * } - if$ - year "year" bibinfo.check -%<dtbf> bolden - * - } - if$ -%</pub-date&!ay> -%<*pub-date&ay> - year duplicate$ empty$ -%<*!blkyear> - { "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$ - pop$ "????" } -%</!blkyear> -%<*blkyear> - { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ - pop$ "" } -%</blkyear> -%<!dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check extra.label * } -%<dtbf> { "year" bibinfo.check bolden extra.label * } - if$ - t empty$ address empty$ and - { * } -%<!pub-xc> { ", " swap$ * * } -%<pub-xc> { " " swap$ * * } - if$ -%</pub-date&ay> -%<pub-par|(pub-date&!pub-xpar)> ")" * -%<*!(pub-date&ay)> - } - if$ -%</!(pub-date&ay)> -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.publisher.address'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.publisher.address} -{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.organization.address'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.organization.address} -{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`name.or.dash'} -% This function stores what is on the stack, compares it with previous value, -% and replaces it with a long dash if they are equal. What is on the stack -% should be author or editor names for the current entry. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*nmdash> -STRINGS {oldname} - -FUNCTION {name.or.dash} -{ 's := - oldname empty$ - { s 'oldname := s } - { s oldname = -%<*!au-col> -%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" } -%<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" } -%<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" } -%</!au-col> -%<*au-col> -%<!nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---" add.blank } -%<nmd-2&!nmd-3> { "---{}---" add.blank } -%<nmd-3> { "---{}---{}---" add.blank } -%</au-col> - { s 'oldname := s } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -%</nmdash> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`article'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<*dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> - format.date "year" output.check - date.block -%</dt-beg&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<*!jtit-x> - format.title "title" output.check -%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<*blk-tit|blk-tita> -%<!tit-col> new.sentence -%<tit-col> add.colon -%</blk-tit|blk-tita> -%</!jtit-x> - crossref missing$ - { - journal -%<jxper> remove.dots - "journal" bibinfo.check -%<!jttl-rm> emphasize -%<injnl> word.in swap$ * - "journal" output.check -%<jnm-x> add.blank -%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> - format.date "year" output.check - date.block -%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> - format.vol.num.pages output -%<doi&agu-doi> format.doi output -%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull -%<!pp-last> format.pages output - } - if$ -%<*pp-last> - eid empty$ - { format.journal.pages } - { format.journal.eid } - if$ -%</pp-last> -%<issn> format.issn output -%<(doi|(url-doi&!url))&!agu-doi> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!jdt-p&!jdt-pc&!jdt-vs&!jdt-v> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<*revdata> - format.url output -%</revdata> - fin.entry -%<harnm|url-nl> write.url -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`book'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check -%<ay> editor format.key output -%<!edpar&(edparc|edparxc)&!au-col> add.blank -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash - } - { format.authors output.nonnull -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ -%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%<!numser> format.number.series output -%<pre-edn> format.edition output -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence -%<numser> format.number.series output -%<pg-bk&pg-pre> format.book.pages output - format.publisher.address output - } - { -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon - format.book.crossref output.nonnull -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check - } - if$ -%<!pre-edn> format.edition output -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<isbn> format.isbn output -%<pg-bk&!pg-pre> format.book.pages output -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`booklet'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.title "title" output.check -%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon - howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output - address "address" bibinfo.check output -%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check -%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output -%<isbn> format.isbn output -%<pg-bk> format.book.pages output -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date output -%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`inbook'} -% The medical journals, with option \texttt{dt-jnl}, have the date as part of -% the journal specification. For chapters in books, they want date and pages -% to appear at the end, with a space between them. (For journals, there is to be -% no space.) Suppress the chapter specification (for now). -% -% The \texttt{dt-jnl} option usually behaves as the default, except for some -% special entries, like this one. -% -% Restore the chapter specification (2004 Feb 9) after someone complained. -% There are still some bugs here. If some date punctuation is specified, say -% with \texttt{yrp-semi} for a semi-colon after the year, this appears always, -% even if there is no text following. But then this to be an unlikely wish anyway, -% since such punctuation options are best suited for \texttt{dt-beg}. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check -%<ay> editor format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash - } - { format.authors output.nonnull -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ -%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { -%<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output -%<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output - format.bvolume output -%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check -%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%<!numser> format.number.series output -%<pre-edn> format.edition output -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence -%<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output -%<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output - } - { -%<*dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check -%</dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl|a|!a> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon - format.book.crossref output.nonnull -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&pub-date> format.date "year" output.check - } - if$ -%<!pre-edn> format.edition output -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<*isbn> - crossref missing$ - { format.isbn output } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</isbn> -%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> - format.date "year" output.check - date.block -%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> -%<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`incollection'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<*!jtit-x> - format.title "title" output.check -%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%</!jtit-x> - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check -%<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle -%<pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output -%<pre-pub> format.publisher.address output -%<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output -%<!numser> format.number.series output -%<pre-edn> format.edition output - format.chapter.pages output -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence -%<!pre-pub&numser> format.number.series output -%<!pre-pub> format.publisher.address output -%<!pre-edn> format.edition output -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<isbn> format.isbn output - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ -%<*(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> - format.date "year" output.check - date.block -%</(!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl)&!pub-date> -%<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`inproceedings'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<dt-beg&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg&!pub-date> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<*!jtit-x> - format.title "title" output.check -%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%</!jtit-x> - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check -%<bt-qq> end.quote.btitle -%<*!pre-pub> -%<!ser-ed> format.bvolume output -%<!numser> format.number.series output -%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output -%</!pre-pub> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence -%<numser> format.number.series output - publisher empty$ - { format.organization.address output } - { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output - format.publisher.address output - } - if$ -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!dt-jnl&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<*pre-pub> - format.bvolume output -%<!numser> format.number.series output -%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output -%</pre-pub> -%<isbn> format.isbn output -%<issn> format.issn output - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull -%<(dt-beg|dt-end|!dt-jnl)&!pp-last> format.pages output - } - if$ -%<*!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last> -%<!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<!pub-date> date.block -%<jdt-v|jdt-vs|jdt-p|!jdt-pc> add.blank - format.pages "pages" output.check -%</!dt-beg&!dt-end&dt-jnl&!pp-last> -%<pp-last> format.pages "pages" output.check -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`conference'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`manual'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay> -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb - organization "organization" bibinfo.check output - address "address" bibinfo.check output - format.edition output -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -%</ay> -%<*!ay> -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization "organization" bibinfo.check - duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$ - { output - address "address" bibinfo.check output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> address new.block.checka - address "address" bibinfo.check output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> organization address new.block.checkb - organization "organization" bibinfo.check output - address "address" bibinfo.check output - } - if$ - format.edition output -%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check -%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date output -%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -%</!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`mastersthesis'} -% To format a master's thesis. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<*!thtit-x> -%<!thtit-a> format.btitle -%<thtit-a> format.title - "title" output.check -%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%</!thtit-x> - bbl.mthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" bibinfo.warn output - address "address" bibinfo.check output -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`misc'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output -%<*ay> -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.title output -%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%</ay> -%<*!ay> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output -%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> howpublished new.block.checka -%</!ay> - howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output -%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check -%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date output -%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -%<!ay> empty.misc.check -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`phdthesis'} -% To format a doctoral thesis. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<*!thtit-x> -%<!thtit-a> format.btitle -%<thtit-a> format.title - "title" output.check -%<thtit-a&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%</!thtit-x> - bbl.phdthesis format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" bibinfo.warn output - address "address" bibinfo.check output -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`presentation'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*pres> -FUNCTION {presentation} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.title output -%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon - format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check - month "month" output.check - year "year" output.check -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output - new.sentence - type missing$ 'skip$ - {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output} - if$ -%<*url-blk&!harnm> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm> - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -%</pres> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`proceedings'} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay> -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.editors output - editor format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output -%<!numser> format.number.series output -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence -%<numser> format.number.series output - publisher empty$ - { format.organization.address output } - { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output - format.publisher.address output - } - if$ -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<isbn> format.isbn output -%<issn> format.issn output -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end&!pub-date> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -%</ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay> -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output - } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output -%<!numser> format.number.series output - editor empty$ - { publisher empty$ -%<!numser> 'skip$ -%<numser> { format.number.series output } - { -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence -%<numser> format.number.series output - format.publisher.address output - } - if$ - } - { publisher empty$ - { -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence -%<numser> format.number.series output - format.organization.address output } - { -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.sentence -%<numser> format.number.series output - organization "organization" bibinfo.check output - format.publisher.address output - } - if$ - } - if$ -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end&!pub-date> format.date "year" output.check -%<isbn> format.isbn output -%<issn> format.issn output -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -%</!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`techreport'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<trtit-b> format.btitle -%<!trtit-b> format.title - "title" output.check -%<!trtit-b&blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<blk-tit&!tit-col> new.sentence -%<blk-tit&tit-col> add.colon -%<!trnum-it> format.tr.number output.nonnull -%<trnum-it> format.tr.number emphasize output.nonnull - institution "institution" bibinfo.warn output - address "address" bibinfo.check output -%<!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note output -%<*!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date "year" output.check -%</!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`unpublished'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check -%<ay> author format.key output -%<au-col> add.colon -%<nmdash> name.or.dash -%<ay&dt-beg> format.date "year" output.check -%<!ay&dt-beg> format.date output -%<dt-beg> date.block -%<!dt-beg&!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.title "title" output.check -%<blk-com&tit-qq> end.quote.title -%<ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date "year" output.check -%<!ay&!dt-beg&!dt-end> format.date output -%<doi|(url-doi&!url)> format.doi output -%<*url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.url output -%</url-blk&!harnm&!revdata> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block -%<(blk-com|blk-tit|blk-tita)&blknt> new.sentence - format.note "note" output.check -%<*ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date output -%</ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<*!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<!blk-com&!blk-tit&!blk-tita> new.block - format.date output -%</!ay&!dt-beg&dt-end> -%<eprint> format.eprint output -%<revdata> format.url output - fin.entry -%<(harnm|url-nl)&!revdata> write.url -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`default.type'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -READ -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay|alph|!seq-no> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`sortify'} -% In \texttt{btxbst.doc}/\texttt{.mbs}, the \texttt{sortify} function is -% left out for unsorted alpha-style citations. This leads to an error, -% because it is still used. So leave it in here too. \emph{In fact, do away -% with unsorted alpha style, since it is as useless as unsorted author--year -% listings.} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {sortify} -{ purify$ - "l" change.case$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -INTEGERS { len } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`chop.word'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {chop.word} -{ 's := - 'len := - s #1 len substring$ = - { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } - 's - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay&alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`format.lab.names'} -% The function \texttt{format.lab.names} formats by author--year or the -% \texttt{alpha} style as in the original \texttt{alpha.bst}. -% Only major difference is that there should be no unsorted (\texttt{seq-no}) -% versions of this. Patashnik was clearly very unhappy about accommodating -% such an animal, and in fact, his unsorted alpha style crashes \btx. -% I also provide the \texttt{vonx} option here to ignore the \textsl{von} -% part of the name. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -INTEGERS { et.al.char.used } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used} -{ #0 'et.al.char.used := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {format.lab.names} -{ 's := -%<*alf-1> -%<!vonx> s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ -%<vonx> s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$ - duplicate$ text.length$ #2 < - { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</alf-1> -%<*!alf-1&alf-f> -%<!vonx> s #1 "{vv{}}{ll}" format.name$ -%<vonx> s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ -%</!alf-1&alf-f> -%<*!alf-1&!alf-f> - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames #1 > - { numnames #4 > - { #3 'namesleft := } - { numnames 'namesleft := } - if$ - #1 'nameptr := - "" - { namesleft #0 > } - { nameptr numnames = - { s nameptr "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { "{\etalchar{+}}" * - #1 'et.al.char.used := - } -%<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } -%<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } -%<!vonx> { s nameptr "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ * } -%<vonx> { s nameptr "{l{}}" format.name$ * } - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ - numnames #4 > - { "{\etalchar{+}}" * - #1 'et.al.char.used := - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } -%<!vonx> { s #1 "{v{}}{l{}}" format.name$ -%<vonx> { s #1 "{l{}}" format.name$ - duplicate$ text.length$ #2 < - { pop$ s #1 "{ll}" format.name$ #3 text.prefix$ } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ -%</!alf-1&!alf-f> -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!ay&alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% The function for the standard citation: one or two authors cited full, but for -% more than two, only the first with \emph{et~al.} given. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay&!mcite> -FUNCTION {format.lab.names} -{ 's := - "" 't := -%<!jnrlab> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ -%<*jnrlab> -%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ -%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> s #1 "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ -%</jnrlab> -%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font - s num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ -%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font -%<*!etal-it> -%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * -%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * -%</!etal-it> -%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * -%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font -%<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't := - } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { -% %<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font -%<*!etal-it> -%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * -%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * -%</!etal-it> -%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * -%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font -%<lab&!and-rm> "others" 't := - } -%<*!harnm> -%<*!amper> - { bbl.and space.word * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ -%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font - * } -%</!amper> -%<*amper> - { " \& " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ -%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font - * } -%</amper> -%</!harnm> -%<*harnm> - { " \harvardand{} " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ -%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font - * } -%</harnm> - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -%<*lab&!and-rm> - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { cite.name.font } - if$ -%</lab&!and-rm> -} - -%</ay&!mcite> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The code for formating author--year citations with more than one author -% before \emph{et al.} or selecting a number other than two for truncating, -% is much the same as the \texttt{format.full.names} function. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay&mcite> -FUNCTION {format.lab.names} -{'s := - "" 't := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr -%<!jnrlab> "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ -%<*jnrlab> -%<!nm-rv&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ -%<nm-rv|nm-rvv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx> "{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ -%</jnrlab> -%<lab&and-rm> cite.name.font - 't := - nameptr #1 > - { -%<mct-1> nameptr #2 = -%<mct-2> nameptr #3 = -%<mct-3> nameptr #4 = -%<mct-4> nameptr #5 = -%<mct-5> nameptr #6 = -%<mct-6> nameptr #7 = -%<mct-x2> numnames #2 > and -%<mct-x3> numnames #3 > and -%<mct-x4> numnames #4 > and -%<mct-x5> numnames #5 > and -%<mct-x6> numnames #6 > and - { "others" 't := - #1 'namesleft := } - 'skip$ - if$ - namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { - s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" = - { 't := } - { pop$ } - if$ - t "others" = - { -%<lab&!and-rm&(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font -%<*!etal-it> -%<lab&and-rm&!etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal cite.name.font * -%<!lab|!and-rm|etal-rm> " " * bbl.etal * -%</!etal-it> -%<etal-it> " " * bbl.etal emphasize * -%<lab&!and-rm&!(etal-it|etal-rm)> cite.name.font - } - { -%<*!harnm> -%<*!and-xcom> - numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</!and-xcom> -%<!amper> bbl.and -%<amper> "\&" -%</!harnm> -%<harnm> "\harvardand{}" - space.word * t * - } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -%<*lab&!and-rm> - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { cite.name.font } - if$ -%</lab&!and-rm> -} - -%</ay&mcite> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`author.key.label'} -% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.key.label'} -% \begin{macro}{`author.key.organization.label'} -% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.organization.label'} -% \begin{macro}{`editor.key.label'} -% Have to be very careful with the options \texttt{ay}, \texttt{alph}, and -% \texttt{seq-no} here. The first two are actually mutually exclusive, and -% \texttt{ay} should dominate. The \texttt{seq-no} option only applies for -% numerical (\texttt{!ay}) but not alphabetic (\texttt{alph}) selections. -% This whole block of coding dealing with labels is only included for -% author--year or alphabetic or ordered numerical. -% That is, \texttt{ay} or \texttt{alph} or \texttt{!seq-no} is true. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay|alph> -FUNCTION {author.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } -%<ay> 'key -%<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } -%<ay> 'key -%<!ay> { key #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -%</ay|alph> -%<*!ay&alph> -FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { organization empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { key #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { organization empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { key #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -%</!ay&alph> -%<*ay> -FUNCTION {editor.key.label} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.authors'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {calc.short.authors} -{ type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.key.label - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.key.label - 'author.key.label - if$ - } - if$ - 'short.list := -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`calc.label'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {calc.label} -{ calc.short.authors - short.list -%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn)> "(" -%<har|ast|cay|nmd|alk|cn> ", " - * - year duplicate$ empty$ -%<keyxyr> short.list key field.or.null = or -%<(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "" } -%<!(blkyear|keyxyr)> { pop$ "????" } -%<!note-yr> { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } -%<note-yr> 'skip$ - if$ - * - 'label := -} - -%</ay> -%<*!ay&alph> -FUNCTION {calc.label} -{ type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.key.label - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.key.organization.label - { type$ "manual" = - 'author.key.organization.label - 'author.key.label - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - duplicate$ - year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #2 substring$ - * - 'label := - year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ - * - sortify 'sort.label := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!ay&alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*har|cay|nmd|ast|cn> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`calc.short.label'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {calc.short.label} -{ calc.short.authors short.list - 'label := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</har|cay|nmd|ast|cn> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.names'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {sort.format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - "" - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr -%<*xintls> -%<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}" -%<vonx> "{ll{ }}" -%</xintls> -%<*!xintls> -%<*!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> -%<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" -%<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" -%</!nm-init&!nm-rev&!nm-rev1&!nm-rv&!nm-rvx&!nm-rvcx&!nm-rvv&!nm-rvvc> -%<*nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv|nm-rvvc> -%<!vonx> "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" -%<vonx> "{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" -%</nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1|nm-rv|nm-rvx|nm-rvcx|nm-rvv|nm-rvvc> -%</!xintls> - format.name$ 't := - nameptr #1 > - { -%<*nmlm> -%<m1> nameptr #1 -%<m2> nameptr #2 -%<m3> nameptr #3 -%<m4> nameptr #4 -%<m5> nameptr #5 -%<m6> nameptr #6 -%<m7> nameptr #7 -%<m8> nameptr #8 -%<m9> nameptr #9 -%<m0> nameptr #0 -%<m10> #10 + -%<m20> #20 + -%<m30> #30 + -%<m40> #40 + -%<m50> #50 + -%<m60> #60 + -%<m70> #70 + -%<m80> #80 + -%<m90> #90 + - #1 + = -%<x1> numnames #1 -%<x2> numnames #2 -%<x3> numnames #3 -%<x4> numnames #4 -%<x5> numnames #5 -%<x6> numnames #6 -%<x7> numnames #7 -%<x8> numnames #8 -%<x9> numnames #9 -%<x0> numnames #0 -%<x10> #10 + -%<x20> #20 + -%<x30> #30 + -%<x40> #40 + -%<x50> #50 + -%<x60> #60 + -%<x70> #70 + -%<x80> #80 + -%<x90> #90 + - > and - { "others" 't := - #1 'namesleft := } - 'skip$ - if$ -%</nmlm> - " " * - namesleft #1 = t "others" = and - { "zzzzz" 't := } - 'skip$ - if$ -%<*seq-lab|seq-key|seq-labc> - numnames #2 > nameptr #2 = and - { "zz" * year field.or.null * " " * -%<seq-labc> #1 'namesleft := - } -%<seq-labc> { t sortify * } -%<!seq-labc> 'skip$ - if$ -%</seq-lab|seq-key|seq-labc> -%<!seq-labc> t sortify * - } - { t sortify * } - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`sort.format.title'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {sort.format.title} -{ 't := - "A " #2 - "An " #3 - "The " #4 t chop.word - chop.word - chop.word - sortify - #1 global.max$ substring$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`author.sort'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {author.sort} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`author.editor.sort'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`negate.year'} -% This function negates the year by substituting each digit by its -% complement. That is, 0 $\rightarrow$ 9, 1 $\rightarrow$ 8, etc. This is used -% to provide ordering by descending year (latest year first). -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*seq-yrr&!seq-yr> -FUNCTION {negate.year} -{ year empty$ - { "99999" } - { year #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ - year #2 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ * - year #3 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ * - year #4 #1 substring$ chr.to.int$ #105 swap$ - int.to.chr$ * - } - if$ -} -%</seq-yrr&!seq-yr> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`editor.sort'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {editor.sort} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*seq-no> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -INTEGERS { seq.num } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`init.seq'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {init.seq} -{ #0 'seq.num :=} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -EXECUTE {init.seq} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`int.to.fix'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {int.to.fix} -{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ * - #-1 #10 substring$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</seq-no> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`presort'} -% For unsorted author--year, make up the final sorting order in -% \texttt{sort.label} with the original sequence number, for unsorting later. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {presort} -{ calc.label - label sortify - " " - * -%<*!seq-no> - type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.sort - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.sort - 'author.sort - if$ - } - if$ - #1 entry.max$ substring$ -%</!seq-no> -%<*seq-no> - seq.num #1 + 'seq.num := - seq.num int.to.fix -%</seq-no> - 'sort.label := - sort.label - * -%<seq-yr> " " * year field.or.null * -%<seq-yrr&!seq-yr> " " * negate.year field.or.null * -%<*!seq-key&!seq-labc&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * -%</!seq-key&!seq-labc&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> -%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> " " * cite$ * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -% "For " cite$ * ", sort.key=" * sort.key$ * warning$ -} - -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`author.organization.sort'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} -{ author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`editor.organization.sort'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} -{ editor empty$ - { organization empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`presort'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {presort} -%<*alph> -{ calc.label - sort.label - " " - * - type$ "book" = -%</alph> -%<!alph>{ type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.sort - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.organization.sort - { type$ "manual" = - 'author.organization.sort - 'author.sort - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -%<alph> * - " " - * -%<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify -%<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify -%<!(seq-yr|seq-yrr)|alph> * - " " - * -%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!alph> swap$ * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -ITERATE {presort} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -SORT -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</ay|alph|!seq-no> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% With version~6.0 of \texttt{natbib}, the author-year styles can also be -% used for numerical citations; then the \texttt{thebibliography} environment -% must have an argument indicating the length of the longest label. -% Simply count the references and add this number as the argument. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -STRINGS { last.label next.extra } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% With computer-generated articles, it is possible to have more than 26 articles -% in one year. It has finally occurred that the extra labels go beyond `z'. -% The current code now allows for `aa', \dots `az', 'ba', \dots `zz'. This -% code was provided by Joseph Wright (2007 Oct 10). -% \begin{macrocode} -INTEGERS { last.extra.num last.extra.num.extended last.extra.num.blank number.label } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`initialize.extra.label.stuff'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} -{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := - "" 'next.extra := - #0 'last.extra.num := - "a" chr.to.int$ #1 - 'last.extra.num.blank := - last.extra.num.blank 'last.extra.num.extended := - #0 'number.label := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {forward.pass} -{ last.label label = - { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := - last.extra.num "z" chr.to.int$ > - { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := - last.extra.num.extended #1 + 'last.extra.num.extended := - } - 'skip$ - if$ - last.extra.num.extended last.extra.num.blank > - { last.extra.num.extended int.to.chr$ - last.extra.num int.to.chr$ - * 'extra.label := } - { last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := } - if$ - } - { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := - "" 'extra.label := - label 'last.label := - } - if$ - number.label #1 + 'number.label := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay&alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`initialize.longest.label'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := - "" 'next.extra := - #0 'longest.label.width := - #0 'last.extra.num := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{`forward.pass'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {forward.pass} -{ last.sort.label sort.label = - { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := - last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := - } - { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := - "" 'extra.label := - sort.label 'last.sort.label := - } - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!ay&alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`reverse.pass'} -% The extra label is added in braces so that natbib can treat it as one unit. -% This allows extra labels to be more than one letter long. For non-NFSS -% emphasizing, this is no problem, since labels go in |{\em a}|, but for -% non-emphasizing and for NFSS, it caused troubles without the braces. -% The trouble arises with multiple citations in one |\cite| in which -% authors and years are the same, and only the extra label is given for -% the next one. Note: |\emph{a}| is more than one letter long in this sense, -% so it is not just a problem for more than 26 papers with same authors and -% year. -% -% The command |\natexlab| now encloses the extra label for \texttt{natbib} -% styles. This command normally just prints its argument, but for numerical -% citation mode, it swallows its argument. This allows the extra labels to -% be suppressed for numerical citations where they are superfluous. -% The enclosing braces mentioned above must be included here to make the -% entire extra label text a single token for \texttt{natbib}. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {reverse.pass} -{ next.extra "b" = - { "a" 'extra.label := } - 'skip$ - if$ - extra.label 'next.extra := - extra.label -%<xlab-it> emphasize -%<*!html> - duplicate$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * } - if$ -%</!html> - 'extra.label := -%<!(har|ast|cay|nmd|cn)> label extra.label * 'label := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay&alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {reverse.pass} -{ next.extra "b" = - { "a" 'extra.label := } - 'skip$ - if$ - label extra.label * 'label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ - extra.label 'next.extra := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!ay&alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<ay>EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} -%<!ay&alph>EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay|alph> -ITERATE {forward.pass} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -REVERSE {reverse.pass} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</ay|alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*ay> -FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} -{ sort.label - " " - * -%<seq-yrr> negate.year field.or.null sortify -%<!seq-yrr> year field.or.null sortify -%<(seq-yr|seq-yrr)&!(seq-lab|seq-key|seq-labc)> swap$ - * -%<*!seq-key&!seq-labc&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * -%</!seq-key&!seq-labc&!seq-yr&!seq-yrr> -%<seq-key|seq-yr|seq-yrr> " " * cite$ * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -% "For " cite$ * ", bib.sort.key=" * sort.key$ * warning$ -%<har|cay|nmd|cn|ast> calc.short.label -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -ITERATE {bib.sort.order} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -SORT -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</ay> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*!ay&!alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -STRINGS { longest.label } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -%<*!cite> -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := -%</!cite> -%<cite>{ cite$ 'label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!ay&!alph> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`begin.bib'} -% The function \texttt{begin.bib} writes the initial text to the \texttt{.bbl} -% file. The most important matter here is that the \texttt{thebibliography} -% environment is invoked. -% -% Note: the French quotation marks are called `guillimets'; Adobe erroneously -% named the symbols `guillimot', which is an arctic bird. The error has so -% propagated, that it can no longer be corrected. \LaTeX\ took it over. -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -%<*!html> -%<*!ay&alph> -{ et.al.char.used - { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ } - 'skip$ - if$ - preamble$ empty$ -%</!ay&alph> -%<ay|!alph>{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ -%<ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" number.label int.to.str$ * "}" * -%<!ay> "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * - write$ newline$ -%<*(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> - "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$ - "\typeout{WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING}" write$ newline$ - "\typeout{The bst file has been generated with inconsistent options}" - write$ newline$ - "\typeout{Read the warning message at the start of the bst file}" - write$ newline$ - "\typeout{**********************************}" write$ newline$ -%</(!nmft&(nmft-it|nmft-sc|nmft-bf|nmft-def))|(!lab&(lab-it|lab-bf|lab-sc|lab-def))> -%<*!plntx> -%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{`#1'}" -%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\newcommand{\enquote}[1]{``#1''}" -%</!plntx> -%<*plntx> -%<!tit-it&tit-qq&qt-s> "\def\enquote#1{`#1'}" -%<!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&!qt-g> "\def\enquote#1{``#1''}" -%</plntx> -%<*!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g> -%<!plntx> "\let\enquote\frquote" -%<*plntx> - "\def\guillemotleft{%" - write$ newline$ - " \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}}" - write$ newline$ - "\def\guillemotright{%" - write$ newline$ - " \leavevmode\raise .27ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}}" - write$ newline$ - "\def\enquote#1{\guillemotleft#1\guillemotright}" -%</plntx> -%</!tit-it&tit-qq&!qt-s&qt-g> -%<!tit-it&tit-qq> write$ newline$ -%<umlaut> "\let\qq=\" quote$ * write$ newline$ -%<em-ul> "\expandafter\ifx\csname uline\endcsname\relax\let\uline\underline\fi" -%<em-ul> write$ newline$ -%<*ay> -%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\natexlab}[1]{#1}" -%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\def\natexlab#1{#1}\fi" - write$ newline$ -%<*har> - "{\catcode`\|=0\catcode`\#=12\catcode`\@=11\catcode`\\=12" write$ newline$ - "|immediate|write|@auxout{\expandafter\ifx\csname natexlab\endcsname\relax\gdef\natexlab#1{#1}\fi}}" - write$ newline$ -%</har> -%</ay> -%<*nmft&nmft-def> -%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibnamefont}[1]{#1}" -%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibnamefont\endcsname\relax" -%<plntx> write$ newline$ -%<plntx> " \def\bibnamefont#1{#1}\fi" - write$ newline$ -%</nmft&nmft-def> -%<*nmft&fnm-def> -%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibfnamefont}[1]{#1}" -%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibfnamefont\endcsname\relax" -%<plntx> write$ newline$ -%<plntx> " \def\bibfnamefont#1{#1}\fi" - write$ newline$ -%</nmft&fnm-def> -%<*lab&lab-def> -%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\citenamefont}[1]{#1}" -%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname citenamefont\endcsname\relax" -%<plntx> write$ newline$ -%<plntx> " \def\citenamefont#1{#1}\fi" - write$ newline$ -%</lab&lab-def> -%<*(url&!harnm)|eprint> -%<*!plntx> -%<nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{\texttt{#1}}" -%<!nfss> "\providecommand{\url}[1]{{\tt #1}}" - write$ newline$ - "\providecommand{\urlprefix}{}" - write$ newline$ -%</!plntx> -%<*plntx> - "\expandafter\ifx\csname url\endcsname\relax" - write$ newline$ -%<nfss> " \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}\fi" -%<!nfss> " \def\url#1{{\tt #1}}\fi" - write$ newline$ - "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlprefix\endcsname\relax\def\urlprefix{}\fi" - write$ newline$ -%</plntx> -%</(url&!harnm)|eprint> -%<*doi> - "\expandafter\ifx\csname urlstyle\endcsname\relax" - write$ newline$ -%<*!plntx> - " \providecommand{\doi}[1]{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\else" - write$ newline$ - " \providecommand{\doi}{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi" - write$ newline$ -%</!plntx> -%<*plntx> - " \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax" - write$ newline$ - " \def\doi#1{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}#1}\fi \else" - write$ newline$ - " \expandafter\ifx\csname doi\endcsname\relax" - write$ newline$ - " \def\doi{doi:\discretionary{}{}{}\begingroup \urlstyle{rm}\Url}\fi \fi" - write$ newline$ -%</plntx> -%</doi> -%<*url-doi&url> - "\providecommand{\doiprefix}{doi: }" - write$ newline$ - "\expandafter\ifx\csname href\endcsname\relax" - write$ newline$ - " \providecommand{\urldoi}[1]{#1}\else" - write$ newline$ - " \providecommand{\urldoi}[1]{\href{https://doi.org/#1}{#1}}\fi" - write$ newline$ -%</url-doi&url> -%<*lang> -%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\selectlanguage}[1]{\relax}" -%<*plntx> - "\expandafter\ifx\csname selectlanguage\endcsname\relax" - write$ newline$ - " \def\selectlanguage#1{}\fi" -%</plntx> - write$ newline$ -%</lang> -%<*!plntx> -%<*babel> - "\input{babelbst.tex}" write$ newline$ - "\newcommand{\Capitalize}[1]{\uppercase{#1}}" write$ newline$ - "\newcommand{\capitalize}[1]{\expandafter\Capitalize#1}" write$ newline$ -%</babel> -%<*annote> - "\providecommand{\bibAnnoteFile}[1]{%" - write$ newline$ - " \IfFileExists{#1}{\begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\" - write$ newline$ - " \textsc{Annotation:}\ \input{#1}\end{quotation}}{}}" - write$ newline$ - "\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[2]{%" - write$ newline$ - " \begin{quotation}\noindent\textsc{Key:} #1\\" - write$ newline$ - " \textsc{Annotation:}\ #2\end{quotation}}" - write$ newline$ -%</annote> -%</!plntx> -%<*bibinfo> -%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\bibinfo}[2]{#2}" -%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname bibinfo\endcsname\relax\def\bibinfo#1#2{#2}\fi" - write$ newline$ -%</bibinfo> -%<*eprint> -%<!plntx> "\providecommand{\eprint}[2][]{\url{#2}}" -%<plntx> "\expandafter\ifx\csname eprint\endcsname\relax\def\eprint#1{\url{#1}}\fi" - write$ newline$ -%</eprint> -} -%</!html> -%<*html> -{ -"<html><head><title>Bibliography Listing</title></head>" write$ newline$ -"<body>" write$ newline$ -"<h2>Bibliography</h2>" write$ newline$ -%<htdes>"<dl>" write$ newline$ -%<!htdes&htlist>"<ol>" write$ newline$ -} -%</html> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -ITERATE {call.type$} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{`end.bib'} -% \begin{macrocode} -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ -%<!html> "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -%<html> "</dl></body></html>" write$ newline$ -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -EXECUTE {end.bib} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!head> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</!options&!driver&!bblbst> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{The File \texttt{babelbst.tex} for English} -% The following contains the definitions for the \texttt{babel} language -% selection as they apply to English. This file may be extracted with -% \dtx{} and the option \texttt{bblbst}. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*bblbst> - % This is babelbst.tex for English. - % It should serve as a model for other languages. - % Alternatively, store it under a different name (e.g. englbst.tex) - % and then \input it with a command in babelbst.tex. -\def\bbland{and} \def\bbletal{et~al.} -\def\bbleditors{editors} \def\bbleds{eds.} -\def\bbleditor{editor} \def\bbled{ed.} -\def\bbledby{edited by} -\def\bbledition{edition} \def\bbledn{edn.} -\def\bblvolume{volume} \def\bblvol{vol.} -\def\bblof{of} -\def\bblnumber{number} \def\bblno{no.} -\def\bblin{in} -\def\bblpages{pages} \def\bblpp{pp.} -\def\bblpage{page} \def\bblp{p.} -\def\bbleidpp{pages} -\def\bblchapter{chapter} \def\bblchap{chap.} -\def\bbltechreport{Technical Report} -\def\bbltechrep{Tech. Rep.} -\def\bblmthesis{Master's thesis} -\def\bblphdthesis{Ph.D. thesis} -\def\bblfirst{First} \def\bblfirsto{1st} -\def\bblsecond{Second} \def\bblsecondo{2nd} -\def\bblthird{Third} \def\bblthirdo{3rd} -\def\bblfourth{Fourth} \def\bblfourtho{4th} -\def\bblfifth{Fifth} \def\bblfiftho{5th} -\def\bblst{st} \def\bblnd{nd} \def\bblrd{rd} -\def\bblth{th} -\def\bbljan{January} \def\bblfeb{February} \def\bblmar{March} -\def\bblapr{April} \def\bblmay{May} \def\bbljun{June} -\def\bbljul{July} \def\bblaug{August} \def\bblsep{September} -\def\bbloct{October} \def\bblnov{November} \def\bbldec{December} -%</bblbst> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \Finale diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.pdf Binary files differindex af76f1c69e1..1cc15b18c7f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-rcs-merlin.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-template.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-template.tex index 61d410f7a13..3ca3fda9b46 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-template.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/cjs-template.tex @@ -59,16 +59,16 @@ %% page automatically. \begin{englishabstract} <Insert your English abstract here. The abstract should be concise - --- up to 10 lines long --- and descriptive. Avoid symbols as much - as possible. Formulas are strongly discouraged, and citations - should be avoided.> + (up to 10 lines long) and descriptive. Avoid symbols as much as + possible. Formulas are strongly discouraged, and citations should + be avoided.> \end{englishabstract} \begin{frenchabstract} <Insérer le texte du résumé en français ici. Le résumé doit être - concis --- une dizaine de lignes --- et descriptif. Éviter autant - que possible les symboles. Les équations mathématiques sont - fortement découragées et les citations sont à éviter.> + concis (une dizaine de lignes) et descriptif. Éviter autant que + possible les symboles. Les équations mathématiques sont fortement + déconseillées et les citations sont à éviter.> [We will supply a French abstract for those authors who can't prepare it themselves.] \end{frenchabstract} @@ -102,9 +102,10 @@ <Free form text> \end{supplement} - %% DATA SHARING (optional - comment out if unused). Describe how to - %% access data that you wish to share. Provide a permanent link such - %% as a Document Object Identifier (DOI) or an URL. + %% DATA SHARING (mandatory). In accordance with the Expect Data + %% Sharing editorial policy of Wiley, make a statement about the + %% availability or absence of shared data. Provide a permanent link + %% such as a Document Object Identifier (DOI) or an URL. \begin{sharing} <Free form text> \end{sharing} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/rcs-gabarit.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/rcs-gabarit.tex index 78053a97542..1b5735334c1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/rcs-gabarit.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/cjs-rcs-article/rcs-gabarit.tex @@ -61,18 +61,18 @@ %% la page de titre automatiquement. \begin{englishabstract} <Insert your English abstract here. The abstract should be concise - --- up to 10 lines long --- and descriptive. Avoid symbols as much - as possible. Formulas are strongly discouraged, and citations - should be avoided.> + (up to 10 lines long) and descriptive. Avoid symbols as much as + possible. Formulas are strongly discouraged, and citations should + be avoided.> [Un résumé en anglais sera fourni pour les auteurs qui ne peuvent le préparer eux-mêmes.] \end{englishabstract} \begin{frenchabstract} <Insérer le texte du résumé en français ici. Le résumé doit être - concis --- une dizaine de lignes --- et descriptif. Éviter autant - que possible les symboles. Les équations mathématiques sont - fortement découragées et les citations sont à éviter.> + concis (une dizaine de lignes) et descriptif. Éviter autant que + possible les symboles. Les équations mathématiques sont fortement + déconseillées et les citations sont à éviter.> \end{frenchabstract} %% MOTS-CLÉS. Fournir une liste de mots-clés en ordre alphabétique. @@ -106,10 +106,11 @@ <Texte libre> \end{supplement} - %% PARTAGE DES DONNÉES (optionnel - commenter si inutilisé). - %% Expliquer comment accéder à des données de l'article mises à - %% disposition. Fournir un lien permanent, comme un identificateur - %% d'objets numériques (DOI) ou une adresse URL. + %% PARTAGE DES DONNÉES (obligatoire). Conformément à la politique + %% éditoriale «Expect Data Sharing» de Wiley, vous devez indiquer + %% les conditions de partage des données de recherche, ou l'absence + %% de celles-ci, le cas échéant. Fournir un lien permanent, comme un + %% identificateur d'objets numériques (DOI) ou une adresse URL. \begin{sharing} <Texte libre> \end{sharing} |